WO2018171604A1 - Information transmission method and apparatus - Google Patents

Information transmission method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018171604A1
WO2018171604A1 PCT/CN2018/079721 CN2018079721W WO2018171604A1 WO 2018171604 A1 WO2018171604 A1 WO 2018171604A1 CN 2018079721 W CN2018079721 W CN 2018079721W WO 2018171604 A1 WO2018171604 A1 WO 2018171604A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
matrix
antenna port
access network
pmi
port groups
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2018/079721
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
黄逸
任海豹
李元杰
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2018171604A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018171604A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H04B7/046Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting taking physical layer constraints into account
    • H04B7/0469Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting taking physical layer constraints into account taking special antenna structures, e.g. cross polarized antennas into account
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621Feedback content
    • H04B7/0626Channel coefficients, e.g. channel state information [CSI]

Definitions

  • the present application relates to communication technologies, and in particular, to a method and device for transmitting information.
  • Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output (Massive MIMO) technology is one of the key technologies of New Radio Access Technology (NR), which can increase system capacity by using more space degrees of freedom. Therefore, it has been extensively studied.
  • the transmitting end in order to improve system transmission performance by performing precoding on the transmitting end, the transmitting end needs to know channel state information (CSI), and the CSI is usually obtained by the receiving end for channel measurement and reported to the system.
  • the sender In the prior art, the CSI reported by the receiving end to the transmitting end mainly includes a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), a Precoding Matrix Index (PMI), and a Rank Indication (RI).
  • CQI Channel Quality Indicator
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Index
  • RI Rank Indication
  • the transmitting end may determine the precoding matrix according to the PMI, and perform precoding processing on the data to improve system transmission performance.
  • Multi-panel dual-polarized array antennas are introduced in large-scale MIMO technology. As a whole, the array spacing of the antenna structure is not uniform, and the existing precoding matrix is designed for uniform matrix structure, and is not suitable for multiple The dual-polarized array antenna of the panel continues to be used, which may cause beam shape changes, which may cause problems such as beam accuracy degradation and system performance loss.
  • the present application provides a method and a device for transmitting information, in order to solve the technical problem that the precoding matrix in the prior art cannot be applied to a multi-panel dual-polarized array antenna, and if the prior art is pre-
  • the coding matrix is used for multi-panel dual-polarized array antennas, and the resulting beam shape change leads to technical problems of beam accuracy degradation and system performance loss.
  • the application provides a method for transmitting information, including:
  • Step 1 The terminal obtains a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device through multiple antenna port groups;
  • Step 2 The terminal determines target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix according to the codebook, where the codebook includes a correspondence between a precoding matrix and the indication information, where the precoding matrix is a product of the first matrix and the second matrix, and a first matrix for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising a portion of the plurality of antenna port groups or a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to all antenna port groups;
  • Step 3 The terminal sends the foregoing target indication information to the access network device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal receives the first configuration information from the access network device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the codebook used by the terminal.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal receives second configuration information from the access network device, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
  • the second configuration information includes at least one of the number of antenna port groups and the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  • the foregoing target indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
  • the present application provides a method for transmitting information, where the method is used for an access network device, and the access network device sends information through multiple antenna port groups, and the method includes:
  • Step 1 The access network device receives channel state information reported by the terminal, and the channel state information includes target indication information.
  • Step 2 The access network device determines, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix corresponding to the target indication information, where the codebook includes a correspondence between the indication information and the precoding matrix, where the precoding matrix is a product of the first matrix and the second matrix.
  • the first matrix is configured to select a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or to characterize a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, and the second matrix includes part or all of the antennas of the plurality of antenna port groups The sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the port group.
  • the method further includes:
  • the access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the foregoing codebook.
  • the method further comprises:
  • the access network device sends second configuration information to the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the foregoing codebook.
  • the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  • the foregoing target indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used to represent the multiple a phase difference between the wireless channels corresponding to the antenna port group; further, the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is W, and Among them, in the formula Indicates the length is a matrix, k is equal to any value of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • N is the number of antenna port groups of the access network device
  • M is the antenna port in the antenna port group Quantity
  • the phase difference between the two polarization directions of the antenna port group Equal to any value in ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, and the first matrix is configured to select from the multiple antenna port groups.
  • a first antenna port group specifically, the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is W, and among them, Indicates the length is The matrix, k is equal to any value of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • N is the antenna port group on the access network device Number
  • M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, and the first matrix is configured to select from the multiple antenna port groups.
  • a first antenna port group specifically, the first matrix is The second matrix is Target precoding matrix among them, Indicates the length is a matrix, k is equal to any of j 1 , j 2 ... j N ;
  • I M represents an identity matrix of length M ⁇ M; an element in ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ is 1, other elements are 0, N is the total number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group.
  • the phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Is equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ , the ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ is determined according to a first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N is determined according to the second PMI.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, and the first matrix is configured to select from the multiple antenna port groups.
  • a first antenna port group specifically, the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is among them, Indicates the length is The matrix, k is equal to j 1 ;
  • I M represents an identity matrix of length M ⁇ M; one element in ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ is 1, the other elements are 0, and N is the access network
  • the total number of antenna port groups on the device where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used to represent between the wireless channels corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups.
  • Phase difference specifically, the first matrix is The second matrix is Target precoding matrix among them, Indicates the length is a matrix, k is equal to any value of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • N is the number of antenna port packets on the access network device
  • M is each antenna port group The number of antenna ports in the The phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Equal to any value in ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇
  • l is the phase difference between the corresponding radio channels of each antenna port group in the S antenna port groups
  • l is the value in the set ⁇ 2,4,8,... ⁇
  • X is equal to ⁇
  • the number of quantization bits, l is determined according to the first PMI
  • j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used to represent between the wireless channels corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups.
  • the number of quantization bits l is determined according to the first PMI, and j 1 is determined according to the second PMI.
  • the target indication information further includes: a third PMI with a value of 0 corresponding to the target precoding matrix, and the target precoding matrix includes a product of the first matrix and the second matrix, specifically:
  • the target precoding matrix is equal to the product of the first matrix, the second matrix, and the third matrix; wherein, the third matrix is a unit matrix, and the number of rows and the number of columns of the unit matrix are equal to the antenna port of the access network device. total.
  • the first PMI includes a modulation symbol that is reported on the uplink shared channel PUSCH, and the modulation symbol is a symbol that is quantized and modulated by ⁇ in the first matrix.
  • the application provides a terminal, comprising: a unit or means for performing the steps of the above first aspect.
  • the application provides an access network device, including: a unit or means for performing the steps of the second aspect above.
  • the present application provides a terminal comprising at least one processing element for storing a program and data, and at least one storage element for performing the first aspect of the present application The method provided.
  • the present application provides an access network device including at least one processing element for storing programs and data, and at least one processing element for performing the present application
  • the second aspect provides a method.
  • the application provides a terminal comprising at least one processing element (or chip) for performing the method of the above first aspect.
  • the application provides an access network device comprising at least one processing element (or chip) for performing the method of the above second aspect.
  • the present application provides a processing program for information that, when executed by a processor, is used to perform the method of the above first aspect.
  • the present application provides a processing program for information that, when executed by a processor, is used to perform the method of the second aspect above.
  • the present application provides a program product, such as a computer readable storage medium, comprising the program of the ninth aspect.
  • the present application provides a program product, such as a computer readable storage medium, including the program of the tenth aspect.
  • the target precoding matrix W considers the difference parameter between the antenna port groups, or the target precoding matrix W may be a precoding matrix for a first antenna port group. Therefore, even if there are multiple antenna panels in the access network device, and the spacing of the plurality of antenna panel arrays is not uniform, the present application can correct the directivity of multiple beams by using both methods, thereby avoiding excessive side lobes. The beamforming gain is increased, which in turn increases the capacity of the antenna.
  • FIG. 1 is a network architecture diagram provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • 1a is a schematic structural diagram of a multi-panel dual-polarized array antenna according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a method for transmitting information provided by the present application
  • 2a is a signaling flowchart of an embodiment of a method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6B is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10A is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10B is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the method and device for transmitting information provided by the present application can be applied to the system architecture shown in FIG. 1.
  • the system includes: an access network device and at least one terminal, and the access network device sends data to the terminal through an antenna.
  • the structure of the antenna has evolved into a multi-panel dual-polarized array antenna.
  • FIG. 1 a is a schematic structural diagram of a multi-panel dual-polarized array antenna according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna includes a plurality of antenna panels.
  • Each square on the left side of the figure represents an antenna panel, and each of the intersecting lines on the right side represents an antenna array, and each oblique line in the cross line represents a polarization direction.
  • d g, H and d g, V represent the distance between the antenna panels in the horizontal and vertical directions , respectively, where d g, H and d g, V may be the same or different.
  • the number of antenna elements is not limited.
  • a terminal also called a User Equipment (UE)
  • UE User Equipment
  • UE User Equipment
  • a terminal is a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, an in-vehicle device, and the like.
  • terminals are: mobile phones, tablets, laptops, PDAs, mobile Internet devices (MIDs), wearable devices, such as smart watches, smart bracelets, pedometers, and the like.
  • MIDs mobile Internet devices
  • wearable devices such as smart watches, smart bracelets, pedometers, and the like.
  • the Radio Access Network is the part of the network that connects the terminal to the wireless network.
  • a RAN node or a RAN device or an access network device is a node or device in a radio access network, and may also be referred to as a base station.
  • RAN nodes are: gNB, Transmission Reception Point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), Radio Network Controller (RNC), and Node B (Node).
  • the RAN may include a Centralized Unit (CU) node and a Distributed Unit (DU) node.
  • CU Centralized Unit
  • DU Distributed Unit
  • This structure separates the protocol layers of the eNB in Long Term Evolution (LTE). The functions of some protocol layers are centrally controlled in the CU. The functions of some or all of the remaining protocol layers are distributed in the DUs. Centrally control each DU.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • Multiple means two or more, and other quantifiers are similar. "and/or”, describing the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate that there are three cases where A exists separately, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists separately.
  • the character "/" generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
  • the design of the existing precoding matrix is designed for a uniform antenna array.
  • the antenna arrays in the uniform antenna array are evenly distributed, that is, the distance between the antenna elements is equal. Therefore, the design using a conventional precoding matrix changes the beam shape without the required beam, resulting in reduced beam accuracy and system performance loss.
  • the method and device for transmitting information provided by the embodiments of the present application when the antenna array spacing is not uniform, for example, a multi-panel antenna, divides the entire antenna into multiple antenna port groups, and designs a matrix to reflect the difference between the antenna port groups. Then, the precoding matrix is characterized by the matrix and the sub-precoding matrix of the antenna port groups, thereby solving the problem of beam precision degradation caused by the linear precoding matrix. Or designing a matrix to select an antenna port group, so that the precoding matrix is only for one antenna port group, which reduces the problem of beam precision degradation caused by the difference between the antenna port groups. Therefore, the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can correct the directivity of multiple beams corresponding to the antenna panel, avoid excessive side lobes, thereby improving beamforming gain, and thereby increasing the antenna. Capacity.
  • the antenna ports on one panel may be divided into one group, or the antenna ports in the same polarization direction on each panel may be divided into one group.
  • FIG. 2 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a method for transmitting information provided by the present application.
  • the terminal sends the target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix W to the access network device based on the reference signal sent by the access network device through the multiple antenna port groups, so that the access network device according to the target indication
  • the information determines the specific process of the target precoding matrix W.
  • the method includes the following steps:
  • the access network device sends information to the terminal by using multiple antenna port groups.
  • the information may be a downlink reference signal.
  • the terminal obtains a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device through multiple antenna port groups.
  • the access network device has multiple antenna port groups, and each antenna port group includes one or more ports.
  • the access network device may have multiple antenna panels, and the spacing between the multiple antenna panels may be equal or not equal, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the antenna port may be a beamformed CSI-RS antenna port for transmitting a beamformed CSI-RS signal, and a beamformed CSI-RS antenna port may correspond to one beam, and each antenna panel may change a beam right.
  • the values form a plurality of beams directed in multiple directions, the plurality of beams corresponding to a plurality of different beamformed CSI-RS antenna ports.
  • the access network device When the access network device needs to perform precoding on the downlink data, optionally, the access network device sends the downlink reference signal to the terminal through multiple antenna port groups. After receiving the reference signal sent by the access network device through the multiple antenna port groups, the terminal device performs channel estimation based on the reference signals to obtain a measurement result H, where the H is a channel matrix. Then, the terminal may perform SVD decomposition on the H to obtain a feature vector (ie, a unitary matrix V), and then compare the feature vector with each precoding matrix in the codebook, and select a precoding matrix closest to the feature vector as a target. Precoding matrix.
  • a feature vector ie, a unitary matrix V
  • the terminal determines target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix according to the codebook, where the codebook includes a correspondence between a precoding matrix and the indication information, where the precoding matrix is a product of the first matrix and the second matrix.
  • the first matrix is configured to select a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or to characterize a difference parameter between the multiple antenna port groups, where the second matrix includes the multiple a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to some or all of the antenna port groups of the antenna port group;
  • S104 The terminal sends the target indication information to the access network device.
  • the target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix may be determined according to the preset codebook of the terminal device side, where the target indication information may be the codebook corresponding to the target precoding matrix. Index, or PMI.
  • the preset codebook on the terminal device side is the new codebook provided by the application.
  • the new codebook may be embodied in the form of a correspondence between the codebook index and the precoding matrix, and may also be embodied in the form of a table.
  • the new codebook includes a plurality of precoding matrices, and each precoding matrix corresponds to one indication information.
  • Each precoding matrix in the codebook may include a product of both the first matrix and the second matrix.
  • "each precoding matrix may include a product of both the first matrix and the second matrix”.
  • each precoding matrix is equal to the product of the first matrix and the second matrix, and may also be a product between the first matrix, the second matrix and other matrices or other parameters, where the "product" may be the first matrix and The product of the second matrix may also be the Kronecker product of the first matrix and the second matrix.
  • one precoding matrix in the new codebook provided by the present application may be split into the first matrix. And the second matrix, or split into more matrices.
  • the first matrix is configured to select a first antenna port group from a plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device or to identify a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to a part or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups of the network device, wherein the sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to one antenna port group in the second matrix is the antenna port group class B codebook
  • the sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to it For example, if the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group is 4, the sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to the antenna port group is a precoding matrix in the codebook of the 4-antenna port in the codebook of classB.
  • the difference parameter between the multiple antenna port groups may be a phase difference between respective wireless channels of the multiple antenna port groups, where the phase difference refers to a phase between frequency domain impulse responses of the wireless channel.
  • the difference parameter may also be a parameter capable of characterizing other differences between the plurality of antenna port groups, such as amplitude differences and the like.
  • the access network device receives channel state information reported by the terminal, where the channel state information includes target indication information.
  • the access network device determines, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix W corresponding to the target indication information.
  • the access network device and the terminal both store the new codebook provided by the present application. Therefore, based on the new codebook, after the access network device receives the channel state information sent by the terminal, determining the target precoding matrix W from the new codebook based on the target indication information in the channel state information, and further utilizing the The target precoding matrix W precodes the downlink data to improve the performance of the system.
  • the target precoding matrix W considers the difference parameter between the antenna port groups, or the target precoding matrix W can be a precoding matrix for one first antenna port group, and therefore, even the access network device
  • the present application can correct the directivity of multiple beams by using both methods, avoiding excessive side lobes, and improving the beam shaping gain. Increased the capacity of the antenna.
  • the method includes:
  • the access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook.
  • S202 The terminal receives the first configuration information from the access network device.
  • the access network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal after the reference signal is sent by using the multiple antenna port groups, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook, that is, the terminal is notified Which codebook is used to determine the target precoding matrix.
  • the same number of antenna ports corresponds to multiple sets of new codebooks (that is, the codebook provided by the present application), and the access network device may determine the number of antenna ports based on the number of antenna ports on which the reference signal is transmitted.
  • the codebook then informs the terminal of the selected codebook in advance through the first configuration information, so that the terminal device can combine the decomposition result (ie, the matrix V) after obtaining the channel measurement result H and performing SVD decomposition on the terminal device.
  • the precoding matrix with the highest correlation with the unitary matrix may be directly searched from the codebook indicated by the first configuration information as the target precoding matrix W, thereby combining the target precoding matrix W and the codebook to determine the target precoding matrix.
  • W corresponds to the target indication information in the codebook. Therefore, the embodiment avoids that the access network device searches for the target precoding matrix W from all the new codebooks based on the target indication information, but specifically determines the target preamble directly from the codebook indicated by the first configuration information.
  • the coding matrix W improves the search efficiency of the target pre-compiled matrix.
  • the embodiment may further include the steps of S203 and S204.
  • the S203 and S204 may be performed after S202, and may also be performed in parallel with S201 and S202.
  • S203 The access network device sends second configuration information to the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
  • the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  • S204 The terminal receives the second configuration information from the access network device.
  • the access network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to configure the parameters of the codebook, for example, the number of antenna ports corresponding to the configuration codebook.
  • the second configuration information may include the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  • the content included in the second configuration information may be different in different scenarios.
  • multiple beams formed by multiple antenna panels of the access network device may be combined, and the resources occupied by the multiple components constitute one CSI-RS resource.
  • the number of antenna panels of the access network device is N, that is, the number of antenna port groups on the access network device is N, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is equal to M, then the access network device has M*N antennas.
  • a port (number sum) which may correspond to a precoding matrix of length M*N in the codebook provided by the present application, and therefore needs to perform feedback of indication information based on a codebook of length MN.
  • the second scenario multiple beams formed by one antenna panel on the access network device (ie, beamformed CSI-RS antenna ports) can be combined, and the resources occupied by the access network form a CSI-RS resource.
  • the number of antenna panels is N, that is, the number of antenna port groups on the access network device is N, and the number of beamformed CSI-RS antenna ports in each antenna port group is equal to M. Therefore, there are a total of N CSI-RS resources.
  • the CSI-RS signals transmitted by the antenna ports corresponding to the N CSI-RS resources may be combined to perform CSI measurement, corresponding to a precoding matrix of length M*N, and a codebook of length M*N is used for PMI. Feedback.
  • the second configuration information includes a total number of antenna port groups (N) on the access network device and a number of antenna ports in each antenna port group.
  • the access network device may determine, according to the total number of antenna ports on the access network device, the codebook that is required to be used by the access network device, and then notify the terminal by using the first configuration information, so that the terminal is based on the access network.
  • the device performs channel estimation by using reference signals sent by all antenna port groups of the access network device, and the estimated channel matrix H includes channel information corresponding to all antenna ports.
  • the terminal selects the target precoding matrix W corresponding to the channel matrix H from the codebook notified by the access network device based on the channel matrix H.
  • the target precoding matrix W may be equal to the product of the first matrix and the second matrix, and may also be equal to the Kronecker product of the first matrix and the second matrix.
  • the first matrix is used to select one antenna port group from all antenna port groups of the access network device, which is called a first antenna port group, and the second matrix includes each access network device.
  • the sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the antenna port group the sub-precoding matrix w can be referred to the description of the first embodiment, that is, one sub-precoding matrix w is actually an antenna port group of the access network device corresponding to the existing one.
  • Class B A precoding matrix w in the codebook, such that the N subprecoding matrices w can form a second matrix.
  • the second configuration information includes: the number S of the partial antenna port groups of the first embodiment and the number of antenna ports of each of the S antenna port groups.
  • the access network device may determine, according to the total number of antenna ports of the S antenna port groups determined by the access network device, the codebook that is required to be used by the access network device, and then notify the terminal by using the first configuration information.
  • the channel is estimated based on the reference signals sent by the access network device through the S antenna port groups, and the estimated channel matrix H includes channel information corresponding to all antenna ports in the S antenna port groups.
  • the terminal selects the target precoding matrix W corresponding to the channel matrix H from the codebook notified by the access network device based on the channel matrix H.
  • the target precoding matrix W may be equal to the product of the first matrix and the second matrix, and may also be equal to the Kronecker product of the first matrix and the second matrix.
  • the first matrix is configured to characterize a phase difference between wireless channels corresponding to each antenna port group in the S antenna port groups.
  • the second matrix includes the sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the access network device.
  • the sub-precoding matrix w refer to the description of the first embodiment, that is, a sub-precoding matrix w is actually connected.
  • One antenna port group of the network access device corresponds to a precoding matrix w in the existing class B codebook, so that the S sub-precoding matrices w can form a second matrix.
  • the indication information in the new codebook provided by the application may include two PMIs, where the target indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, where the PMI may be a codebook index in the codebook.
  • the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix
  • the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
  • the content of the second configuration information in the two different scenarios and the process of determining the target precoding matrix W are described.
  • the following describes the structure of the target precoding matrix in different scenarios from different scenarios.
  • the target precoding matrix W can be split into a two-level matrix, and can also be split into a three-level matrix. See the following possible implementation manners.
  • the target precoding matrix W is divided into two levels of matrix as an example.
  • the structure of the third-level matrix refer to the following embodiments:
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used Selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is W, and Wherein said Indicates the length is Matrix (ie Yes a matrix of row 1 columns, the k+1th element is 1 and the remaining elements are 0, the k is equal to any value in j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device
  • the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ , the ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
  • the target precoding matrix It can be split into two levels of matrix, which are a first matrix and a second matrix.
  • One element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0.
  • Multiplying the first matrix and the second matrix is equivalent to An antenna port group is selected from all antenna port groups of the access network device, and the obtained target precoding matrix W is a precoding matrix corresponding to the first antenna port group selected for the first matrix.
  • the value of the first PMI determines a value of a 1 , a 2 ... a N
  • the value of the second PMI determines a value of j 1 , j 2 . . . N N
  • the first PMI may include multiple values
  • the second PMI may also include multiple values.
  • a 1 , a 2 may have a value of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1.
  • W 2 is a second matrix, and W 1 is a first matrix.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1 , a 2 is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, that is, the values of j 1 and j 2 may be determined by the second PMI, and j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 .
  • the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
  • the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 1.
  • the codebook structure shown in Table 1 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
  • the corresponding first PMI is i 1,1 , i 1,2
  • the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 . That is, in this example, the first PMI includes two values, namely i 1,1 , i 1,2
  • the second PMI includes three values, namely i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3
  • the phase difference between i 2, 3 and the two polarized antennas on the access network device correspond.
  • i 1,1 is equal to the value of the a 1 element in the first matrix
  • i 1,2 is equal to the value of the a 2 element in the first matrix
  • only one of a 1 , a 2 is 1, i 2 , 1 is equal to j 1 , i 2 , 2 is equal to j 2
  • the terminal device determines that the first PMI i 1,1 of the target precoding matrix W is equal to 0, i 1,2 is equal to 1, and the second PMI of the target precoding matrix W is i 2 , 1 is equal to 0, i 2 , 2 is equal to 1, i 2 , 3 is equal to 1
  • the access network may determine the target precoding matrix according to the codebook shown in Table 1 above.
  • the target precoding matrix W is a preamble corresponding to the first antenna port group selected for the first matrix due to the limitation of the value of the element in the first matrix.
  • the coding matrix therefore, reduces the problem of beam accuracy degradation caused by the difference between antenna port groups, so that the access network device performs downlink data processing using the target precoding matrix W for a first antenna port group When the beam directivity is clear, there will be no excessive beam side lobes.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used Selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is W, and Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k being equal to any of j 1 , j 2 ... j N ; the I M representing an identity matrix of length M ⁇ M; ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ One element is 1, and all other elements are 0.
  • the N is the total number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group.
  • the target precoding matrix W is the same as the target precoding matrix in the first possible implementation manner, and both are In this embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is also split into a two-level matrix.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is I M denotes an identity matrix of length M ⁇ M. One element in ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ in the first matrix is 1, and all other elements are 0.
  • the value of the first PMI determines a 1 , a 2 ...a The value of N
  • the value of the second PMI determines the value of j 1 , j 2 ... j N .
  • the first PMI may include multiple values
  • the second PMI may also include multiple values.
  • a 1 , a 2 may have a value of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1.
  • W 2 is the second matrix
  • W 1 is the first matrix with The sub precoding matrices w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1 , a 2 is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, that is, the values of j 1 and j 2 may be determined by the second PMI, and j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 .
  • the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
  • the target precoding matrix W in this example is the codebook structure shown in Table 1, and the access network device can determine the target from the codebook structure shown in Table 1 according to the first PMI and the second PMI reported by the terminal device. Precoding matrix W.
  • the target precoding matrix W is the first selected for the first matrix due to the definition of the values of the elements of a 1 , a 2 ... a N in the first matrix.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the antenna port group thereby reducing the problem of beam accuracy degradation caused by the difference between the antenna port groups, so that the access network device utilizes the target precoding for a first antenna port group
  • the matrix W performs downlink data processing, its beam directivity is clear, and excessive beam side lobes are not generated.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used Selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k is equal to j 1 ; the I M represents an identity matrix of length M ⁇ M; one element in ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ...
  • N is the total number of antenna port groups on the access network device
  • M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ , the ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 according to the first Two PMI confirmed.
  • the target precoding matrix It is also split into a two-level matrix.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is I M denotes an identity matrix of length M ⁇ M.
  • One element in ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ in the first matrix is 1, and all other elements are 0.
  • the value of the first PMI determines a 1 , a 2 ...a
  • the value of N the value of the second PMI determines the value of j 1 .
  • the first PMI may include multiple values, and the second PMI may also include multiple values.
  • a 1 , a 2 may have a value of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1.
  • W 1 is the first matrix
  • W 2 is the second matrix
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1 , a 2 is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie the value of j can be determined by the second PMI.
  • the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
  • the codebook structure is similar to that in Table 1.
  • the codebook structure is preset on the access network device and the terminal device, so that when the terminal device reports the first PMI and the second PMI, the access network The device can then perform the target precoding matrix W based on the two indications, which is similar to the manner in which the target precoding matrix W is determined in the example of the first possible implementation.
  • the target precoding matrix W is the first selected for the first matrix due to the definition of the values of the elements of a 1 , a 2 ... a N in the first matrix.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the antenna port group thereby reducing the problem of beam accuracy degradation caused by the difference between the antenna port groups, so that the access network device utilizes the target precoding for a first antenna port group
  • the matrix W performs downlink data processing, its beam directivity is clear, and excessive beam side lobes are not generated.
  • the structure of the target precoding matrix W can be split into a two-level matrix, and can also be split into a three-level matrix. See the following possible implementation manners. Taking the target precoding matrix as a two-level matrix as an example, the structure of the three-level matrix can be seen in the following embodiments:
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the multiple antenna port groups
  • the difference parameter between the corresponding wireless channels refers to the phase difference between the wireless channels corresponding to the plurality of antenna port groups characterized by the first matrix.
  • the first matrix is
  • the second matrix is Target precoding matrix Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the S being less than or equal to N
  • the N being the number of antenna port groups on the access network device
  • M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group
  • a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇
  • the X a number of quantization bits equal to ⁇ , the l being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N being determined according to the second PMI.
  • the access network device has a total of N antenna port groups, and the access network device instructs the terminal to select S antenna port groups for channel measurement (S is less than or equal to N), and therefore, the target determined by the terminal
  • the precoding matrix W is a matrix determined based on reference signals transmitted by the S antenna port groups.
  • Target precoding matrix Can be split into two levels of matrix, respectively the first matrix And second matrix It can be known from the structure of the first matrix that the first matrix represents the phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the antenna ports of the S antenna port groups, that is, the target precoding matrix W determined in this embodiment is based on the phase.
  • the difference can be corrected by the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups, avoiding excessive side lobes, increasing the beam shaping gain, and thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna.
  • the value of the first PMI determines a value of l
  • the value of l determines a value of ⁇
  • the value of the second PMI determines a value of j 1 , j 2 ... j N
  • the first PMI may include multiple values
  • the second PMI may also include multiple values.
  • W 2 is a second matrix
  • W 1 is a first matrix.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie j 1 and j 2 and The value may be determined by the second PMI, j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 , and the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
  • ⁇ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing ⁇ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal.
  • the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 2.
  • the codebook structure shown in Table 2 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
  • target precoding matrix The corresponding first PMI is i 1
  • the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 . That is, in this example, the first PMI, i 1 , takes any value of 0, 1 , 2, 3, and the second PMI includes three values, namely i 2,1 , i 2,2 ,i Phase difference between 2,3 and i 2,3 and two polarized antennas on the access network device correspond.
  • the value of i 1 is equal to 1
  • the value of l determines the value of ⁇ , i 2 , 1 is equal to j 1
  • i 2 , 2 is equal to j 2 .
  • the value of the above i 1 may be ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , which mainly depends on the number of quantization bits X of ⁇ , and the maximum value of i 1 is smaller than X;
  • the value of the above i 2, 3 may be Is ⁇ 0,1,2,3 ⁇ , which depends mainly on The quantization bit;
  • the value of the above i 2,1 , i 2,2 may be ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , which mainly depends on the number of antenna ports in one polarization direction.
  • the terminal device determines that the first PMI i 1 of the target precoding matrix W is equal to 1, and the second PMI of the target precoding matrix W is i 2, 1 is equal to 0, i 2 , 2 Equal to 1, i 2 , 3 equals
  • the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups may be corrected based on the phase difference.
  • the beam shaping gain is increased, thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the multiple antenna port groups The phase difference between the corresponding wireless channels, the first matrix is The second matrix is Target precoding matrix Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the S being less than or equal to N
  • the N being the number of antenna port groups on the access network device
  • M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group
  • a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇
  • the X a number of quantization bits equal to ⁇ , the l being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N being determined according to the second PMI.
  • the access network device has a total of N antenna port groups, and the access network device instructs the terminal to select S antenna port groups for channel measurement (S is less than or equal to N), and therefore, the target determined by the terminal
  • the precoding matrix W is a matrix determined based on reference signals transmitted by the S antenna port groups.
  • the target precoding matrix W is the same as the target precoding matrix in the first possible implementation manner in the second scenario.
  • the target precoding matrix W is also split into a two-level matrix. Different from the first possible implementation manner described above, in the embodiment, the first matrix is The second matrix is I M denotes an identity matrix of length M ⁇ M.
  • the first matrix represents the phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the antenna ports of the S antenna port groups, that is, the target precoding matrix W determined in this embodiment is based on the phase.
  • the difference can be corrected by the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups, avoiding excessive side lobes, increasing the beam shaping gain, and thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna.
  • the value of the first PMI determines a value of l
  • the value of l determines a value of ⁇
  • the value of the second PMI determines a value of j 1 , j 2 ... j N
  • the first PMI may include multiple values
  • the second PMI may also include multiple values.
  • I 4 represents a 4 ⁇ 4 identity matrix
  • W 2 is a second matrix.
  • W 1 is the first matrix with The first sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie j 1 and j 2 and The value may be determined by the second PMI, j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 , and the second PMI is a sub-band PMI.
  • ⁇ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing ⁇ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal.
  • the target precoding matrix W in this example is the codebook structure shown in Table 2 above.
  • the access network device can determine the target from the codebook structure shown in Table 2 according to the first PMI and the second PMI reported by the terminal device. Precoding matrix W.
  • the first PMI, the second PMI, and i 1 , i 2,1 , i 2 , 2 , i 2 , 3 in Table 1 refer to the first in the second scenario. A possible implementation manner will not be described herein.
  • the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups can be corrected based on the phase difference.
  • the beam shaping gain is increased, thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the multiple antenna port groups
  • the phase difference between the corresponding wireless channels the first matrix is The second matrix is Target precoding matrix
  • said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k is equal to j 1 , the S is less than or equal to N, the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group , said a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ ,
  • the X a number of quantization bits equal to ⁇ , the 1 being determined according to the first PMI, and the j 1 is corresponding according to the second
  • the target precoding matrix It is also split into a two-level matrix.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is I M denotes an identity matrix of length M ⁇ M. It can be known from the structure of the first matrix that the first matrix represents the phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the antenna ports of the S antenna port groups, that is, the target precoding matrix W determined in this embodiment is based on the phase. The difference can be corrected by the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups, avoiding excessive side lobes, increasing the beam shaping gain, and thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna.
  • the value of the first PMI determines a value of l
  • the value of l determines a value of ⁇
  • the value of the second PMI determines a value of j 1 .
  • the first PMI may include multiple values.
  • the second PMI may also include multiple values.
  • W 1 is the first matrix
  • W 2 is the second matrix
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie the value of j 1 can be determined by the second PMI, which is a sub-band PMI.
  • ⁇ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing ⁇ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal.
  • the codebook structure is similar to that in Table 2.
  • the codebook structure is preset on the access network device and the terminal device, so that when the terminal device reports the first PMI and the second PMI, the access network The device can perform the target precoding matrix W based on the two indication information, which is similar to the method for determining the target precoding matrix W in the example of the first possible implementation manner in the second scenario. Let me repeat.
  • the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups can be corrected based on the phase difference.
  • the beam shaping gain is increased, thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna.
  • the first matrix split by the target precoding matrix W is used to select the first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, or to characterize the S antennas.
  • the phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to each antenna port group in the port group can avoid excessive side lobes of the beam corresponding to the antenna panel of the access network device, thereby improving beamforming gain and increasing the antenna. Capacity.
  • the channel state information reported by the terminal to the access network device may further include third indication information with a value of 0. Therefore, the access network device may be based on the foregoing first PMI, The second PMI and the third indication information whose value is 0, the third indication information may be a third PMI, where the third PMI is used to indicate the third matrix.
  • the target precoding matrix W is determined from the new codebook provided by the present application. That is to say, in the embodiment, the target precoding matrix W can be split into three matrices, which are respectively a product of the first matrix, the second matrix and the third matrix, and the third matrix is a unit matrix, the unit The number of rows and columns of the matrix are equal to the total number of antenna ports of the access network device.
  • the target precoding matrix W in the implementation manner is the same as the W of the two-level matrix in the first scenario, and the parameter interpretation is the same, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is The third matrix I MN is an identity matrix of (M ⁇ N) ⁇ (M ⁇ N).
  • a 1 a 2 may have a value of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1.
  • W 2 is a second matrix, and W 1 is a first matrix. with The first sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1
  • a 2 is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, that is, the values of j 1 and j 2 may be determined by the second PMI, and j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 .
  • the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
  • the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 3.
  • the codebook structure shown in Table 3 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
  • the corresponding first PMI is i 3,1 , i 3,2
  • the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3
  • the corresponding third indication information is i 1 . That is, in this example, the first PMI includes two values, namely i 3,1 , i 3,2
  • the second PMI includes three values, namely i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3
  • the phase difference between i 2, 3 and the two polarized antennas on the access network device correspond.
  • i 3,1 is equal to the value of the a 1 element in the first matrix
  • i 3,2 is equal to the value of the a 2 element in the first matrix
  • only one of a 1 , a 2 is 1, i 2 , 1 is equal to j 1 , i 2 , 2 is equal to j 2 .
  • the target precoding matrix W in the implementation manner is the same as the W of the two-level matrix in the first scenario, and the parameter interpretation is the same, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is The third matrix I MN is an identity matrix of (M ⁇ N) ⁇ (M ⁇ N).
  • a 1 a 2 may have a value of ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1.
  • W 2 is a second matrix, and W 1 is a first matrix.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1
  • a 2 is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, that is, the values of j 1 and j 2 may be determined by the second PMI, and j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 .
  • the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
  • the target precoding matrix W in the implementation manner is the same as the W of the two-level matrix in the second scenario, and the parameter interpretation is the same, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is
  • the third matrix I MN is an identity matrix of (M ⁇ N) ⁇ (M ⁇ N).
  • W 2 is a second matrix
  • W 1 is a first matrix.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie j 1 and j 2 and The value may be determined by the second PMI, j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 , and the second PMI is a sub-band PMI.
  • ⁇ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing ⁇ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal.
  • the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 4.
  • the codebook structure shown in Table 4 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
  • the corresponding first PMI is i 3
  • the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3
  • the corresponding third indication information is i 1 . That is, in this example, the first PMI, i 3 , takes any value of 0, 1, 2, 3
  • the second PMI includes three values, namely i 2,1 , i 2,2 ,i Phase difference between 2,3 and i 2,3 and two polarized antennas on the access network device Correspondingly, the value of i 1 is always zero.
  • the value of i 3 is equal to 1, and the value of l determines the value of ⁇ , i 2 , 1 is equal to j 1 , and i 2 , 2 is equal to j 2 .
  • the value of the above i 3 may be ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , which mainly depends on the number of quantization bits X of ⁇ , and the maximum value of i 3 is smaller than X;
  • the value of the above i 2, 3 may be Is ⁇ 0,1,2,3 ⁇ , which depends mainly on The quantization bit;
  • the value of the above i 2,1 , i 2,2 may be ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ , which mainly depends on the number of antenna ports in one polarization direction.
  • the target precoding matrix W in the implementation manner is the same as the W of the two-level matrix in the second scenario, and the parameter interpretation is the same, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is
  • the third matrix I MN is an identity matrix of (M ⁇ N) ⁇ (M ⁇ N).
  • W 2 is a second matrix
  • W 1 is a first matrix.
  • the W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information.
  • W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI.
  • the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI.
  • W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie j 1 and j 2 and The value may be determined by the second PMI, j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 , and the second PMI is a sub-band PMI.
  • ⁇ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing ⁇ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH, and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal, the third indication information is always equal to zero.
  • codebook structure shown in Table 4 above may also be selected, and details are not described herein again.
  • this embodiment provides a structure of another target precoding matrix W.
  • one antenna port group corresponds to one sub-precoding matrix w.
  • each polarization direction of each antenna port group corresponds to one sub-precoding matrix w, where the sub-precoding matrix is used. w is
  • the target precoding matrix W is also introduced from the above two scenarios.
  • the target precoding matrix W can be split into two levels of matrix, ie Wherein the first matrix is The second matrix is Of course, it can be split into a three-level matrix, and the split third matrix is a unit matrix.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is Of course, it can be split into a three-level matrix, and the split third matrix is a unit matrix.
  • W corresponds to a two-level matrix of the first matrix and the second matrix
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is (a 1 , a 2 , a 3 , a 4 ) corresponds to the first PMI, that is, the value of the first PMI determines the respective values of (a 1 , a 2 , a 3 , a 4 ), (a 1 , a 2 , a 3 , a 4 ) only one is 1, the rest are 0, (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ) corresponds to the second PMI, ie the value of the second PMI determines (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ).
  • (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ) may be the same or different.
  • the first PMI can be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI.
  • the second PMI can be a subband PMI.
  • the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 5.
  • the codebook structure shown in Table 5 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
  • target precoding matrix Corresponding first PMI is i 1,1 , i 1,2 , i 1,3 , i 1,4 , and the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 , i 2, 4 . That is, in this example, the first PMI includes four values, namely i 1,1 , i 1,2 , i 1,3 , i 1,4 , and the second PMI includes four values, respectively i 2,1 , i 2 , 2 , i 2 , 3 , i 2 , 4 .
  • i 1,1 is equal to the value of the a 1 element in the first matrix
  • i 1,2 is equal to the value of the a 2 element in the first matrix
  • i 1,3 is equal to the value of the a 3 element in the first matrix
  • i 1, 4 is equal to the value of the a 4 element in the first matrix
  • i 2,1 is equal to k 1
  • i 2,2 is equal to k 2
  • i 2,3 is equal to k 3
  • i 2,2 is equal to k 4 .
  • the target precoding matrix W can be split into two levels of matrix, ie Wherein the first matrix is The second matrix is Of course, it can be split into a three-level matrix, and the split third matrix is a unit matrix.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is Of course, it can be split into a three-level matrix, and the split third matrix is a unit matrix.
  • W corresponds to a two-level matrix of the first matrix and the second matrix
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is Corresponding to the first PMI, that is, the value of the first PMI determines
  • the respective values, (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ) correspond to the second PMI, that is, the value of the second PMI determines (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ).
  • (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ) may be the same or different.
  • the quantization is performed, and is carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device along with the routing terminal.
  • the first PMI can be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI.
  • the second PMI can be a subband PMI.
  • the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 6.
  • the codebook structure shown in Table 6 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
  • the corresponding first PMI is i 1,1 , i 1,2 , i 1,3, and the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 , i 2,4 . That is, in this example, the first PMI includes three values, respectively i 1,1 , i 1,2 , i 1,3, and the second PMI includes four values, namely i 2,1 , i 2 , 2 , i 2 , 3 , i 2 , 4 .
  • i 1,1, is equal to l 1
  • the value of i 1,2, is equal to l 2
  • the value of i 1,3, is equal to l 3
  • i 2,1 is equal to k 1
  • i 2,2 is equal to k 2
  • i 2 , 3 is equal to k 3
  • i 2 , 2 is equal to k 4 .
  • this embodiment provides a structure of another target precoding matrix W.
  • the target precoding matrix W is also introduced from the above two scenarios.
  • Target precoding matrix in this scenario In the target precoding matrix W, with Is a matrix of dimensions 2 x 1, the elements of the matrix represent multiple beams on the same panel, and the elements of the matrix may contain amplitude information or phase information.
  • One of the above elements ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ is 1, and all other elements are 0 (ie, ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ is a panel selection factor), optionally, ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ can also be an amplitude factor, and the value range is a real number between 0 and 1.
  • a N ⁇ is corresponding to the first PMI, and the with Corresponding according to the second PMI.
  • the second matrix with The scalar quantization can also be performed as a modulation symbol carried on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device.
  • the target precoding matrix can be split into two levels of matrix, ie
  • W 1 is the first matrix
  • W 2 is the second matrix
  • N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device
  • the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group
  • I M is a unit matrix of M*M.
  • the target precoding matrix can be split into a three-level matrix, that is,
  • W 1 is the first matrix
  • W 2 is the second matrix
  • W 3 is the unit matrix I M of M* M .
  • N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device
  • the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group.
  • the ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ is corresponding to the first PMI
  • I M corresponds to a third PMI that is always 0.
  • the access network device has two antenna port groups
  • the target precoding matrix is split into a two-level matrix.
  • the target precoding matrix When the target precoding matrix is split into three levels of matrix, it can be:
  • Target precoding matrix in this scenario In the target precoding matrix W, with Is a matrix of dimensions 2 x 1, the elements of the matrix represent multiple beams on the same panel, and the elements of the matrix may contain amplitude information or phase information.
  • the S is less than or equal to N, where N is the total number of antenna port packets on the access network device, and the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group.
  • the second matrix with The scalar quantization can also be performed as a modulation symbol carried on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device.
  • the target precoding matrix can be split into two levels of matrix, ie
  • W 1 is the first matrix
  • W 2 is the second matrix
  • S is the total number of partial antenna port groups selected by the access network device for the access network device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, and I M is a unit of M*M Array according to the first PMI, the with Corresponding according to the second PMI.
  • the target precoding matrix can be split into a three-level matrix, that is,
  • W 1 is the first matrix
  • W 2 is the second matrix
  • W 3 is a third matrix I M corresponding to the first PMI, with Corresponding to the second PMI, I M corresponds to a third PMI that is always 0.
  • the access network device has three antenna port groups
  • the target precoding matrix is split into a two-level matrix.
  • the target precoding matrix When the target precoding matrix is split into three levels of matrix, it can be:
  • the present application provides a plurality of target precoding matrices W, each of which takes into account a difference parameter between antenna port groups, or the target precoding matrix W may be for a first antenna.
  • the precoding matrix of the port group therefore, even if there are multiple antenna panels in the access network device, and the spacing of the plurality of antenna panel arrays is not uniform, the target precoding matrix W can correct the directivity of the multiple beams, thereby avoiding generation
  • the multiple side lobes increase the beamforming gain, which in turn increases the antenna capacity.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal provided by the present application.
  • the terminal can be implemented by software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the terminal includes: a determining module 301 and a sending module 302.
  • the determining module 301 is configured to obtain a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device by using multiple antenna port groups, and determine target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix according to the codebook, where the codebook And including a correspondence between a precoding matrix that is a product of a first matrix and a second matrix, where the first matrix is used to select a first antenna port from the plurality of antenna port groups a group or a parameter for characterizing a difference between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to a part or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups;
  • the sending module 302 is configured to send the target indication information to an access network device.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of the terminal provided by the present application.
  • the terminal further includes: a first receiving module 303.
  • the first receiving module 303 is configured to receive first configuration information from the access network device before the determining module 301 obtains the target precoding matrix, where the first configuration information is used to indicate that the terminal uses The codebook.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of the terminal provided by the present application.
  • the terminal further includes: a second receiving module 304.
  • the second receiving module 304 is configured to receive second configuration information from the access network device before the determining module 301 obtains the target precoding matrix, where the second configuration information is used to configure the codebook. parameter.
  • the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  • the indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating a PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the wireless channel corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the multiple antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the antenna port group; the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is W, and Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the j N one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network
  • M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ , the ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
  • the terminal provided by the present application can perform the foregoing embodiment of the method for transmitting the information, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • each module of the above terminal is only a division of a logical function, and the actual implementation may be integrated into one physical entity in whole or in part, or may be physically separated.
  • these modules can all be implemented by software in the form of processing component calls; or all of them can be realized in the form of hardware; some modules can be realized by software in the form of processing component calls, and some modules are realized by hardware.
  • the determining module may be a separately set processing element, or may be integrated in a certain chip of the terminal, or may be stored in a memory of the terminal in the form of a program, and is called and executed by a processing element of the terminal. The function of the module.
  • the implementation of other modules is similar.
  • each step of the above method or each of the above modules may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element or an instruction in a form of software.
  • each of the above receiving modules is a module for controlling reception, and the information transmitted by the base station can be received by the receiving device of the terminal, such as an antenna and a radio frequency device.
  • the above sending module is a module for controlling transmission, and can send information to the base station through a transmitting device of the terminal, such as an antenna and a radio frequency device.
  • the above modules may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, such as one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), or one or more microprocessors (digital singnal processor) , DSP), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs).
  • ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • DSP digital singnal processor
  • FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays
  • the processing component can be a general purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU) or other processor that can invoke the program.
  • these modules can be integrated and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
  • SOC system-on-a-chip
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal provided by the present application.
  • the terminal can include a transmitter 160, a memory 161, a processor 162, and at least one communication bus 163.
  • Communication bus 163 is used to implement a communication connection between components.
  • Memory 161 may include high speed RAM memory, and may also include non-volatile memory NVM, such as at least one disk memory, in which various programs may be stored for performing various processing functions and implementing the method steps of the present embodiments.
  • the terminal may further include a receiver 164.
  • the transmitter 160 may be a radio frequency module or a baseband module in the terminal, and the receiver 164 may also be a radio frequency module or a baseband module in the terminal. Wherein both transmitter 160 and receiver 164 are coupled to the processor 162.
  • the processor 162 is configured to obtain a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device by using multiple antenna port groups, and determine, according to the codebook, the target precoding matrix.
  • a target indication information where the codebook includes a correspondence between a precoding matrix and a first matrix, where the precoding matrix is a product of a first matrix and a second matrix, where the first matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the port group or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix including a sub-pre-corresponding to a part or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups Coding matrix
  • the transmitter 160 is configured to send the target indication information to an access network device.
  • the receiver 164 is configured to receive first configuration information from the access network device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the terminal, before the processor 162 obtains a target precoding matrix.
  • the codebook employed.
  • the receiver 164 is further configured to: before the processor 162 acquires the target precoding matrix, receive second configuration information from the access network device, where the second configuration information is used to configure the The codebook's parameters.
  • the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  • the indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating a PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the wireless channel corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is W, and Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the S being less than or equal to N
  • the N being the number of antenna port groups of the access network device
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the multiple antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the antenna port group; the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is W, and Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the j N one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network
  • M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ , the ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
  • the terminal provided by the present application can perform the foregoing embodiment of the method for transmitting the information, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 6B is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal provided by the present application.
  • the terminal includes: a processor 110, a memory 120, and a transceiver 130.
  • the transceiver device 130 can be connected to an antenna.
  • the transceiver 130 receives the information transmitted by the network device through the antenna, and transmits the information to the processor 110 for processing.
  • the processor 110 processes the data of the terminal and sends the data to the network device through the transceiver 130.
  • the memory 120 is used to store a program for implementing the above method embodiments, or the modules of the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 5, and the processor 110 calls the program to perform the operations of the foregoing method embodiments to implement the operations of the foregoing method. Each module shown.
  • part or all of the above units may be implemented by being embedded in a chip of the terminal in the form of an integrated circuit. And they can be implemented separately or integrated. That is, the above units may be configured to implement one or more integrated circuits of the above method, for example, one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), or one or more microprocessors (digital singnal processor) , DSP), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs).
  • ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • microprocessors digital singnal processor
  • FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of an access network device provided by the present application.
  • the access network device can be implemented by using software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the access network device sends information through multiple antenna port groups.
  • the access network device includes: a receiving module 701 and a determining module 702.
  • the receiving module 701 is configured to receive channel state information reported by the terminal, where the channel state information includes target indication information.
  • a determining module 702 configured to determine, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix corresponding to the target indication information, where the codebook includes a correspondence between the indication information and a precoding matrix, where the precoding matrix is a first matrix and a second matrix a first matrix for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising the A sub-precoding matrix corresponding to some or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device provided by the present application.
  • the access network device further includes: a first sending module 703.
  • the first sending module 703 is configured to send first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device provided by the present application.
  • the access network device further includes: a second sending module 704.
  • the second sending module 704 is configured to send second configuration information to the terminal before the receiving module 701 receives channel state information reported by the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook. .
  • the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  • the indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating a PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the wireless channel corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is W, and Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k is equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the S is less than or equal to N
  • the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device
  • the M For the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ ,
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the antenna port group; the first matrix is The second matrix is Target precoding matrix Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the N is the access network
  • M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group
  • a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ , said ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ according to said first PMI, said j 1 , j 2 .. .j N is determined according to the second PMI.
  • An access network device provided by the present application may perform an embodiment of the foregoing method for transmitting information, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • each module of the access network device is only a division of logical functions, and may be integrated into one physical entity or physically separated in whole or in part.
  • these modules can all be implemented by software in the form of processing component calls; or all of them can be realized in the form of hardware; some modules can be realized by software in the form of processing component calls, and some modules are realized by hardware.
  • the determining module may be a separately set processing element, or may be integrated in one of the above-mentioned devices, or may be stored in the memory of the above device in the form of a program, by one of the access network devices.
  • the processing component invokes and performs the function of determining the module.
  • the implementation of other modules is similar.
  • each step of the above method or each of the above modules may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element or an instruction in a form of software.
  • the above sending module is a module for controlling transmission, and can send information to the terminal through a transmitting device of the access network device, such as an antenna and a radio frequency device.
  • the receiving module is a module for controlling receiving, and can receive information sent by the terminal through a receiving device of the access network device, such as an antenna and a radio frequency device.
  • the above modules may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, such as one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), or one or more microprocessors (digital singnal processor) , DSP), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs).
  • ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • DSP digital singnal processor
  • FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays
  • the processing component can be a general purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU) or other processor that can invoke the program.
  • these modules can be integrated and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
  • SOC system-on-a-chip
  • FIG. 10A is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to the present application.
  • the access network device sends information through multiple antenna port groups.
  • the station access network device can include a receiver 30, a memory 31, a processor 32, and at least one communication bus 33.
  • the communication bus 33 is used to implement a communication connection between components.
  • Memory 31 may include high speed RAM memory and may also include non-volatile memory NVM, such as at least one disk memory, in which various programs may be stored for performing various processing functions and implementing the method steps of the present embodiments.
  • the access network device may further include a transmitter 34.
  • the receiver 30 is configured to receive channel state information reported by the terminal, where the channel state information includes target indication information;
  • the processor 32 is configured to determine, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix corresponding to the target indication information, where the codebook includes a correspondence between the indication information and a precoding matrix, where the precoding matrix is a first matrix and a a product of two matrices for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to a part or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups.
  • the sender 34 is configured to send first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook.
  • the sender 34 is further configured to send second configuration information to the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
  • the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  • the indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating a PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the wireless channel corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups.
  • the first matrix is The second matrix is The target precoding matrix is W, and Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k is equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the S is less than or equal to N
  • the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device
  • the M For the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ ,
  • the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the antenna port group; the first matrix is The second matrix is Target precoding matrix Wherein said Indicates the length is a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ...
  • the j N one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network
  • M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device, Equal to any one of ⁇ +1, -1, +j, -j ⁇ , the ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ... a N ⁇ being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
  • An access network device provided by the present application may perform an embodiment of the foregoing method for transmitting information, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 10B is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device provided by the present application.
  • the access network device includes an antenna 110, a radio frequency device 120, and a baseband device 130.
  • the antenna 110 is connected to the radio frequency device 120.
  • the radio frequency device 120 receives the information transmitted by the terminal through the antenna 110, and transmits the information sent by the terminal to the baseband device 130 for processing.
  • the baseband device 130 processes the information of the terminal and sends it to the radio frequency device 120.
  • the radio frequency device 120 processes the information of the terminal and sends it to the terminal through the antenna 111.
  • the above access network device may be located in the baseband device 130.
  • the above various units are implemented in the form of a processing component scheduler, for example, the baseband device 130 includes a processing component 131 and a storage component 132, and the processing component 131 calls the storage component 132 to store The program to perform the method in the above method embodiment.
  • the baseband device 130 may further include an interface 133 for interacting with the radio frequency device 120, such as a common public radio interface (CPRI).
  • CPRI common public radio interface
  • the above units may be one or more processing elements configured to implement the above methods, the processing elements being disposed on the baseband device 130, where the processing elements may be integrated circuits, such as: one or more ASICs, or one or more DSPs, or one or more FPGAs, etc. These integrated circuits can be integrated to form a chip.
  • the above various units may be integrated together in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC), for example, the baseband device 130 includes a SOC chip for implementing the above method.
  • the processing element 131 and the storage element 132 may be integrated into the chip, and the functions of the above method or the above units may be implemented by the processing element 131 in the form of a stored program that calls the storage element 132; or, at least one integrated circuit may be integrated into the chip.
  • the functions of the above methods or the above units may be implemented; or, in combination with the above implementation manners, the functions of some units are implemented in the form of processing component calling programs, and the functions of some units are implemented in the form of integrated circuits.
  • the above access network device comprises at least one processing element, a storage element and a communication interface, wherein at least one processing element is used to perform the method provided by the above method embodiments.
  • the processing element may perform some or all of the steps in the above method embodiments in a manner of executing the program stored in the storage element in the first manner; or in the second manner: through the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor element Some or all of the steps in the foregoing method embodiments are performed in combination with the instructions.
  • the methods provided in the foregoing method embodiments may also be implemented in combination with the first mode and the second mode.
  • the processing elements herein are the same as described above, and may be a general purpose processor, such as a Central Processing Unit (CPU), or may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, for example: one or more specific An Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or one or more digital singnal processors (DSPs), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs).
  • CPU Central Processing Unit
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • DSPs digital singnal processors
  • FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays
  • the storage element can be a memory or a collective name for a plurality of storage elements.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Radio Transmission System (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides an information transmission method and apparatus. The method comprises: a terminal acquires, on the basis of reference signals transmitted through multiple antenna port groups by an access network apparatus, a target precoding matrix; the terminal determining target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix according to a codebook, wherein the codebook includes a correspondence relationship between a precoding matrix and indication information, the precoding matrix is a product of a first matrix and a second matrix, the first matrix is for selecting a first antenna port group from the multiple antenna port groups or for representing a difference parameter among the multiple antenna port groups, and the second matrix includes a sub precoding matrix corresponding to a part or all of the multiple antenna port groups; and the terminal transmitting the target indication information to the access network apparatus. The method is capable of correcting directivity of multiple beams, preventing the occurrence of excessive side lobes, enhancing beamforming gain, and further increasing the capacity of antennas.

Description

信息的传输方法和设备Information transmission method and device
本申请要求于2017年3月24日提交中国专利局、申请号为201710184769.7、申请名称为“信息的传输方法和设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。The present application claims the priority of the Chinese Patent Application, filed on March 24, 2017, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术,尤其涉及一种信息的传输方法和设备。The present application relates to communication technologies, and in particular, to a method and device for transmitting information.
背景技术Background technique
大规模多输入多输出(Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output,Massive MIMO)技术作为新一代无线接入技术(New Radio Access Technology,简称NR)的关键技术之一,能够利用更多的空间自由度提高系统容量,因此其得到了广泛研究。在大规模MIMO系统中,为了通过在发送端进行预编码来提高系统传输性能,发送端需要获知信道状态信息(Channel State Information,简称CSI),而CSI通常由接收端进行信道测量得到并上报给发送端。现有技术中,接收端向发送端上报的CSI主要包括信道质量指示(Channel Quality Indicator,简称CQI),预编码矩阵指示(Precoding Matrix Index,简称PMI)和秩指示(Rank Indication,RI)。发送端可以根据PMI确定预编码矩阵,对数据进行预编码处理,以提高系统传输性能。Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output (Massive MIMO) technology is one of the key technologies of New Radio Access Technology (NR), which can increase system capacity by using more space degrees of freedom. Therefore, it has been extensively studied. In a large-scale MIMO system, in order to improve system transmission performance by performing precoding on the transmitting end, the transmitting end needs to know channel state information (CSI), and the CSI is usually obtained by the receiving end for channel measurement and reported to the system. The sender. In the prior art, the CSI reported by the receiving end to the transmitting end mainly includes a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), a Precoding Matrix Index (PMI), and a Rank Indication (RI). The transmitting end may determine the precoding matrix according to the PMI, and perform precoding processing on the data to improve system transmission performance.
大规模MIMO技术中引入了多面板的双极化阵列天线,从整体上来看,该天线结构的阵子间距不均匀,而现有预编码矩阵是针对均匀的阵子结构设计的,并不适用于多面板的双极化阵列天线,继续使用,可能会引起波束形状改变,从而带来波束精度下降和系统性能损失等问题。Multi-panel dual-polarized array antennas are introduced in large-scale MIMO technology. As a whole, the array spacing of the antenna structure is not uniform, and the existing precoding matrix is designed for uniform matrix structure, and is not suitable for multiple The dual-polarized array antenna of the panel continues to be used, which may cause beam shape changes, which may cause problems such as beam accuracy degradation and system performance loss.
发明内容Summary of the invention
有鉴于此,本申请提供一种信息的传输方法和设备,以期解决现有技术中的预编码矩阵无法适用于多面板的双极化阵列天线的技术问题,以及如果将现有技术中的预编码矩阵用于多面板的双极化阵列天线,所引起的波束形状改变进而带来波束精度下降和系统性能损失的技术问题。In view of this, the present application provides a method and a device for transmitting information, in order to solve the technical problem that the precoding matrix in the prior art cannot be applied to a multi-panel dual-polarized array antenna, and if the prior art is pre- The coding matrix is used for multi-panel dual-polarized array antennas, and the resulting beam shape change leads to technical problems of beam accuracy degradation and system performance loss.
第一方面,本申请提供一种信息的传输方法,包括:In a first aspect, the application provides a method for transmitting information, including:
步骤1:终端基于接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送的参考信号获得目标预编码矩阵;Step 1: The terminal obtains a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device through multiple antenna port groups;
步骤2:终端根据码本确定所述目标预编码矩阵对应的目标指示信息,该码本包括预编码矩阵与指示信息的对应关系,该预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,另外,第一矩阵用于从上述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,第二矩阵包括上述多个天线端口组的部分或全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵;Step 2: The terminal determines target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix according to the codebook, where the codebook includes a correspondence between a precoding matrix and the indication information, where the precoding matrix is a product of the first matrix and the second matrix, and a first matrix for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising a portion of the plurality of antenna port groups or a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to all antenna port groups;
步骤3:终端向接入网设备发送上述目标指示信息。Step 3: The terminal sends the foregoing target indication information to the access network device.
在一种可能的设计中,在上述步骤1之前,还包括:In a possible design, before step 1 above, the method further includes:
终端从接入网设备接收第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于指示终端采用的码本。The terminal receives the first configuration information from the access network device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the codebook used by the terminal.
在一种可能的设计中,在上述步骤1之前,还包括:In a possible design, before step 1 above, the method further includes:
终端从接入网设备接收第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置码本的参数。The terminal receives second configuration information from the access network device, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
在一种可能的设计中,该第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量、天线端口组中天线端口的数量中的至少一个。In one possible design, the second configuration information includes at least one of the number of antenna port groups and the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
在一种可能的设计中,上述目标指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,该第一PMI用于指示第一矩阵,第二PMI用于指示第二矩阵。In a possible design, the foregoing target indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
第二方面,本申请提供一种信息的传输方法,该方法用于接入网设备,接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送信息,该方法包括:In a second aspect, the present application provides a method for transmitting information, where the method is used for an access network device, and the access network device sends information through multiple antenna port groups, and the method includes:
步骤1:接入网设备接收终端上报的信道状态信息,信道状态信息包括目标指示信息;Step 1: The access network device receives channel state information reported by the terminal, and the channel state information includes target indication information.
步骤2:接入网设备根据码本确定目标指示信息对应的目标预编码矩阵,该码本包括指示信息与预编码矩阵的对应关系,该预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,第一矩阵用于从上述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征上述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,第二矩阵包括上述多个天线端口组的部分或者全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵。Step 2: The access network device determines, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix corresponding to the target indication information, where the codebook includes a correspondence between the indication information and the precoding matrix, where the precoding matrix is a product of the first matrix and the second matrix. The first matrix is configured to select a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or to characterize a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, and the second matrix includes part or all of the antennas of the plurality of antenna port groups The sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the port group.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:In one possible design, the method further includes:
接入网设备向终端发送第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置终端采用上述码本。The access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the foregoing codebook.
在一种可能的设计中,在第二方面的步骤1之前,该方法还包括:In a possible design, prior to step 1 of the second aspect, the method further comprises:
接入网设备向终端发送第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置上述码本的参数。The access network device sends second configuration information to the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the foregoing codebook.
在一种可能的设计中,该第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。In one possible design, the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
在一种可能的设计中,上述目标指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,第一PMI用于指示第一矩阵,第二PMI用于指示第二矩阵。In a possible design, the foregoing target indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
结合上述第一方面或者第二方面,在一种可能的设计中,第二矩阵包括上述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,第一矩阵用于表征上述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;进一步地,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000001
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000002
目标预编码矩阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000003
其中,公式中的
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000004
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000005
的矩阵,k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,S小于或等于N,N为接入网设备的天线端口组的数量,M为天线端口组中的天线端口的数量,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000006
为天线端口组两个极化方向之间的相位差,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000007
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000008
为S个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,X等于θ的量化比特数,l由上述第一PMI确定,j 1,j 2...j N由上述第二PMI确定。
With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible design, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used to represent the multiple a phase difference between the wireless channels corresponding to the antenna port group; further, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000001
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000002
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000003
Among them, in the formula
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000004
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000005
a matrix, k is equal to any value of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , S is less than or equal to N, N is the number of antenna port groups of the access network device, and M is the antenna port in the antenna port group Quantity,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000006
The phase difference between the two polarization directions of the antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000007
Equal to any value in {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000008
The phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the S antenna port groups, l=1, . . . , X-1, X is equal to the number of quantization bits of θ, and is determined by the first PMI, j 1 , j 2 ... j N is determined by the second PMI described above.
在一种可能的设计中,第二矩阵包含接入网设备的多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,第一矩阵用于从上述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;具体的,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000009
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000010
目标预编码矩阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000011
其中,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000012
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000013
的矩阵,k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,N为接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000014
为接入网设备上两 个极化天线之间的相位差,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000015
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,{a 1,a 2...a N}由上述第一PMI确定,j 1,j 2...j N由上述第二PMI确定。
In a possible design, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, and the first matrix is configured to select from the multiple antenna port groups. a first antenna port group; specifically, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000009
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000010
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000011
among them,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000012
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000013
The matrix, k is equal to any value of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are 0, N is the antenna port group on the access network device Number, M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000014
For the phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000015
Equal to any of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is determined by the first PMI described above, j 1 , j 2 ... j N The above second PMI is determined.
在一种可能的设计中,第二矩阵包含接入网设备的多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,第一矩阵用于从上述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;具体的,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000016
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000017
目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000018
其中,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000019
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000020
的矩阵,k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值;I M表示长度为M×M的单位矩阵;{a 1,a 2...a N}中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的总个数,M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000021
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000022
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据第二PMI确定。
In a possible design, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, and the first matrix is configured to select from the multiple antenna port groups. a first antenna port group; specifically, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000016
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000017
Target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000018
among them,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000019
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000020
a matrix, k is equal to any of j 1 , j 2 ... j N ; I M represents an identity matrix of length M × M; an element in {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is 1, other elements are 0, N is the total number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000021
The phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000022
Is equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is determined according to a first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N is determined according to the second PMI.
在一种可能的设计中,第二矩阵包含接入网设备的多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,第一矩阵用于从上述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;具体的,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000023
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000024
目标预编码矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000025
其中,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000026
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000027
的矩阵,k等于j 1;I M表示长度为M×M的单位矩阵;{a 1,a 2...a N}中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,N为接入网设备上的天线端口组的总个数,M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000028
为接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000029
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,{a 1,a 2...a N}根据第一PMI确定,j 1根据第二PMI确定。
In a possible design, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, and the first matrix is configured to select from the multiple antenna port groups. a first antenna port group; specifically, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000023
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000024
The target precoding matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000025
among them,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000026
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000027
The matrix, k is equal to j 1 ; I M represents an identity matrix of length M × M; one element in {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is 1, the other elements are 0, and N is the access network The total number of antenna port groups on the device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000028
For the phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000029
Equal to any of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is determined according to the first PMI, and j 1 is determined according to the second PMI.
在一种可能的设计中,第二矩阵包括上述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,第一矩阵用于表征上述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;具体的,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000030
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000031
目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000032
其中,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000033
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000034
的矩阵,k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,S小于或等于N,N为所述接入网设备上天线端口分组的个数,M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000035
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000036
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000037
为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,X为集合{2,4,8,…}中的值,X等于θ的量化比特 数,l根据第一PMI确定,j 1,j 2...j N根据第二PMI确定。
In a possible design, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used to represent between the wireless channels corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups. Phase difference; specifically, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000030
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000031
Target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000032
among them,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000033
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000034
a matrix, k is equal to any value of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , S is less than or equal to N, N is the number of antenna port packets on the access network device, and M is each antenna port group The number of antenna ports in the
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000035
The phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000036
Equal to any value in {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000037
For the phase difference between the corresponding radio channels of each antenna port group in the S antenna port groups, l=1,...,X-1,X is the value in the set {2,4,8,...}, X is equal to θ The number of quantization bits, l is determined according to the first PMI, and j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
在一种可能的设计中,第二矩阵包括上述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,第一矩阵用于表征上述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;具体的,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000038
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000039
目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000040
其中,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000041
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000042
的矩阵,k等于j 1,S小于或等于N,N为接入网设备上天线端口组的个数,M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000043
为接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000044
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000045
为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,X为集合{2,4,8,…}中的值,X等于θ的量化比特数,l根据第一PMI确定,j 1根据第二PMI确定。
In a possible design, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used to represent between the wireless channels corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups. Phase difference; specifically, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000038
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000039
Target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000040
among them,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000041
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000042
The matrix, k is equal to j 1 , S is less than or equal to N, N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000043
For the phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000044
Equal to any value in {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000045
For the phase difference between the corresponding radio channels of each antenna port group in the S antenna port groups, l=1,...,X-1,X is the value in the set {2,4,8,...}, X is equal to θ The number of quantization bits, l is determined according to the first PMI, and j 1 is determined according to the second PMI.
在一种可能的设计中,上述目标指示信息还包括:与目标预编码矩阵对应的值为0的第三PMI,则目标预编码矩阵包括第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,具体为:In a possible design, the target indication information further includes: a third PMI with a value of 0 corresponding to the target precoding matrix, and the target precoding matrix includes a product of the first matrix and the second matrix, specifically:
目标预编码矩阵等于所述第一矩阵、第二矩阵和第三矩阵的积;其中,第三矩阵为一单位阵,单位矩阵的行数和列数均等于所述接入网设备的天线端口总数。The target precoding matrix is equal to the product of the first matrix, the second matrix, and the third matrix; wherein, the third matrix is a unit matrix, and the number of rows and the number of columns of the unit matrix are equal to the antenna port of the access network device. total.
在一种可能的设计中,上述第一PMI包括在上行共享信道PUSCH上随路上报的调制符号,该调制符号为第一矩阵中的θ被量化并调制后的符号。In a possible design, the first PMI includes a modulation symbol that is reported on the uplink shared channel PUSCH, and the modulation symbol is a symbol that is quantized and modulated by θ in the first matrix.
第三方面,本申请提供一种终端,包括:包括用于执行以上第一方面各个步骤的单元或手段(means)。In a third aspect, the application provides a terminal, comprising: a unit or means for performing the steps of the above first aspect.
第四方面,本申请提供一种接入网设备,包括:包括用于执行以上第二方面各个步骤的单元或手段(means)。In a fourth aspect, the application provides an access network device, including: a unit or means for performing the steps of the second aspect above.
第五方面,本申请提供一种终端,包括至少一个处理元件和至少一个存储元件,其中所述至少一个存储元件用于存储程序和数据,所述至少一个处理元件用于执行本申请第一方面种提供的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a terminal comprising at least one processing element for storing a program and data, and at least one storage element for performing the first aspect of the present application The method provided.
第六方面,本申请提供一种接入网设备,包括至少一个处理元件和至少一个存储元件, 其中所述至少一个存储元件用于存储程序和数据,所述至少一个处理元件用于执行本申请第二方面种提供的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides an access network device including at least one processing element for storing programs and data, and at least one processing element for performing the present application The second aspect provides a method.
第七方面,本申请提供一种终端,包括用于执行以上第一方面的方法的至少一个处理元件(或芯片)。In a seventh aspect, the application provides a terminal comprising at least one processing element (or chip) for performing the method of the above first aspect.
第八方面,本申请提供一种接入网设备,包括用于执行以上第二方面的方法的至少一个处理元件(或芯片)。In an eighth aspect, the application provides an access network device comprising at least one processing element (or chip) for performing the method of the above second aspect.
第九方面,本申请提供一种信息的处理程序,该程序在被处理器执行时用于执行以上第一方面的方法。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a processing program for information that, when executed by a processor, is used to perform the method of the above first aspect.
第十方面,本申请提供一种信息的处理程序,该程序在被处理器执行时用于执行以上第二方面的方法。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a processing program for information that, when executed by a processor, is used to perform the method of the second aspect above.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种提供一种程序产品,例如计算机可读存储介质,包括第九方面的程序。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a program product, such as a computer readable storage medium, comprising the program of the ninth aspect.
第十二方面,本申请提供一种提供一种程序产品,例如计算机可读存储介质,包括第十方面的程序。In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a program product, such as a computer readable storage medium, including the program of the tenth aspect.
可见,在以上各个方面以及各可能的设计中,目标预编码矩阵W考虑了天线端口组之间的差异参数,或者,该目标预编码矩阵W可以为针对一个第一天线端口组的预编码矩阵,因此,即使接入网设备存在多个天线面板,且多个天线面板阵列间距不均匀时,本申请通过这两种方式均能够修正多个波束的指向性,避免产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。It can be seen that in the above various aspects and possible designs, the target precoding matrix W considers the difference parameter between the antenna port groups, or the target precoding matrix W may be a precoding matrix for a first antenna port group. Therefore, even if there are multiple antenna panels in the access network device, and the spacing of the plurality of antenna panel arrays is not uniform, the present application can correct the directivity of multiple beams by using both methods, thereby avoiding excessive side lobes. The beamforming gain is increased, which in turn increases the capacity of the antenna.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1为本申请实施例提供的网络架构图;FIG. 1 is a network architecture diagram provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图1a为本申请实施例提供的一种多面板双极化阵列天线的结构示意图;1a is a schematic structural diagram of a multi-panel dual-polarized array antenna according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请提供的信息的传输方法实施例一的信令流程图FIG. 2 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a method for transmitting information provided by the present application
图2a为本申请实施例提供的信息的传输方法实施例的信令流程图;2a is a signaling flowchart of an embodiment of a method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图3为本申请实施例提供的终端实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图4为本申请实施例提供的终端的另一实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图5为本申请实施例提供的终端的另一实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6A为本申请实施例提供的终端的另一实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6B为本申请实施例提供的终端的另一实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 6B is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本申请实施例提供的接入网设备实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图8为本申请实施例提供的接入网设备另一实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图9为本申请实施例提供的接入网设备另一实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10A为本申请实施例提供的接入网设备的另一实施例的结构示意图;FIG. 10A is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10B为本申请实施例提供的接入网设备的另一实施例的结构示意图。FIG. 10B is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
具体实施方式detailed description
本申请提供的信息的传输方法和设备,可以适用于图1所示的系统架构。如图1所示,该系统包括:接入网设备和至少一个终端,接入网设备通过天线向终端发送数据。随着大 规模MIMO技术的引入,天线的结构发展为多面板的双极化阵列天线。请参考图1a,其为本申请实施例提供的一种多面板双极化阵列天线的结构示意图。如图1a所示,该天线包括多个天线面板,图中左侧每个方块代表一个天线面板,右侧的每个交叉线代表天线阵子,交叉线中的每根斜线代表一个极化方向。图中d g,H和d g,V分别代表水平和垂直方向上天线面板之间的距离,其中d g,H和d g,V可以相同,也可以不同。且天线阵子的数量不做限制。 The method and device for transmitting information provided by the present application can be applied to the system architecture shown in FIG. 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the system includes: an access network device and at least one terminal, and the access network device sends data to the terminal through an antenna. With the introduction of massive MIMO technology, the structure of the antenna has evolved into a multi-panel dual-polarized array antenna. Please refer to FIG. 1 a , which is a schematic structural diagram of a multi-panel dual-polarized array antenna according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1a, the antenna includes a plurality of antenna panels. Each square on the left side of the figure represents an antenna panel, and each of the intersecting lines on the right side represents an antenna array, and each oblique line in the cross line represents a polarization direction. . In the figure, d g, H and d g, V represent the distance between the antenna panels in the horizontal and vertical directions , respectively, where d g, H and d g, V may be the same or different. And the number of antenna elements is not limited.
为了更好的理解本申请的技术方案,下面对图1中涉及的网元以及本申请实施例中涉及的其他术语进行解释说明:In order to better understand the technical solutions of the present application, the network elements involved in FIG. 1 and other terms involved in the embodiments of the present application are explained below:
1)、终端,又称之为用户设备(User Equipment,UE),是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例为:手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(Mobile Internet Device,MID)、可穿戴设备,例如智能手表、智能手环、计步器等。1) A terminal, also called a User Equipment (UE), is a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, an in-vehicle device, and the like. Currently, some examples of terminals are: mobile phones, tablets, laptops, PDAs, mobile Internet devices (MIDs), wearable devices, such as smart watches, smart bracelets, pedometers, and the like.
2)、无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)是网络中将终端接入到无线网络的部分。RAN节点或RAN设备或者接入网设备为无线接入网中的节点或设备,又可以称为基站。目前,一些RAN节点的举例为:gNB、传输接收点(Transmission Reception Point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(Radio Network Controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(Base Station Controller,BSC)、基站收发台(Base Transceiver Station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,Home evolved NodeB,或Home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(BaseBand Unit,BBU),或Wifi接入点(Access Point,AP)等。另外,在一种网络结构中,RAN可以包括集中单元(Centralized Unit,CU)节点和分布单元(Distributed Unit,DU)节点。这种结构将长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)中eNB的协议层拆分开,部分协议层的功能放在CU集中控制,剩下部分或全部协议层的功能分布在各个DU中,由CU集中控制各个DU。2) The Radio Access Network (RAN) is the part of the network that connects the terminal to the wireless network. A RAN node or a RAN device or an access network device is a node or device in a radio access network, and may also be referred to as a base station. Currently, some examples of RAN nodes are: gNB, Transmission Reception Point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), Radio Network Controller (RNC), and Node B (Node). B, NB), Base Station Controller (BSC), Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Home Base Station (for example, Home evolved NodeB, or Home Node B, HNB), Baseband Unit (BaseBand Unit, BBU), or Wifi Access Point (AP), etc. In addition, in a network structure, the RAN may include a Centralized Unit (CU) node and a Distributed Unit (DU) node. This structure separates the protocol layers of the eNB in Long Term Evolution (LTE). The functions of some protocol layers are centrally controlled in the CU. The functions of some or all of the remaining protocol layers are distributed in the DUs. Centrally control each DU.
3)、“多个”是指两个或两个以上,其它量词与之类似。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。3) "Multiple" means two or more, and other quantifiers are similar. "and/or", describing the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate that there are three cases where A exists separately, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists separately. The character "/" generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
对于图1a所示的多面板的天线结构,虽然面板内的天线阵子之间距离是相等的,但是面板和面板之间的距离可能不等于天线阵子之间的距离,因此从整体上来看,该天线的天线阵子之间的距离已经不再是均匀的。而现有的预编码矩阵的设计都是针对均匀天线阵列设计的,均匀天线阵列中天线阵子是均匀分布的,即天线阵子之间的距离都是相等的。因此,使用传统的预编码矩阵的设计会改变波束形状,得不到所需波束,从而带来波束精度下降和系统性能损失。For the multi-panel antenna structure shown in FIG. 1a, although the distance between the antenna elements in the panel is equal, the distance between the panel and the panel may not be equal to the distance between the antenna arrays, so as a whole, The distance between the antenna elements of the antenna is no longer uniform. The design of the existing precoding matrix is designed for a uniform antenna array. The antenna arrays in the uniform antenna array are evenly distributed, that is, the distance between the antenna elements is equal. Therefore, the design using a conventional precoding matrix changes the beam shape without the required beam, resulting in reduced beam accuracy and system performance loss.
本申请实施例提供的信息的传输方法和设备,在天线阵列间距不均匀时,例如,多面板天线,将整个天线划分为多个天线端口组,并设计矩阵来反应天线端口组之间的差异性,进而通过该矩阵与这些天线端口组的子预编码矩阵来刻画预编码矩阵,从而解决了线性预编码矩阵引起的波束精度下降问题。或者设计矩阵来选择一个天线端口组,使得预编码矩阵仅针对一个天线端口组,减少了天线端口组之间的差异性带来的波束精度下降的问题。从而通过这两种方式,使得本申请实施例提供的预编码矩阵能够修正天线面板对应的多个波束的指向性,避免产生过多的旁瓣,从而提高波束赋形增益,进而可以增大天线的容量。The method and device for transmitting information provided by the embodiments of the present application, when the antenna array spacing is not uniform, for example, a multi-panel antenna, divides the entire antenna into multiple antenna port groups, and designs a matrix to reflect the difference between the antenna port groups. Then, the precoding matrix is characterized by the matrix and the sub-precoding matrix of the antenna port groups, thereby solving the problem of beam precision degradation caused by the linear precoding matrix. Or designing a matrix to select an antenna port group, so that the precoding matrix is only for one antenna port group, which reduces the problem of beam precision degradation caused by the difference between the antenna port groups. Therefore, the precoding matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application can correct the directivity of multiple beams corresponding to the antenna panel, avoid excessive side lobes, thereby improving beamforming gain, and thereby increasing the antenna. Capacity.
关于天线分组的方式,可以将一个面板上的天线端口划分为一组,或者可以将每个面板上同一极化方向的天线端口算划分为一组。Regarding the manner of antenna grouping, the antenna ports on one panel may be divided into one group, or the antenna ports in the same polarization direction on each panel may be divided into one group.
下面以具体地实施例对本申请的技术方案以及本申请的技术方案如何解决上述技术问题进行详细说明。下面这几个具体的实施例可以相互结合,对于相同或相似的概念或过程可能在某些实施例中不再赘述。The technical solutions of the present application and the technical solutions of the present application are described in detail in the following specific embodiments to solve the above technical problems. The following specific embodiments may be combined with each other, and the same or similar concepts or processes may not be described in some embodiments.
图2为本申请提供的信息的传输方法实施例一的信令流程图。本实施例涉及的是终端基于接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送的参考信号,向接入网设备发送目标预编码矩阵W对应的目标指示信息,以使接入网设备根据该目标指示信息确定目标预编码矩阵W的具体过程。如图2所示,该方法包括如下步骤:FIG. 2 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a method for transmitting information provided by the present application. In this embodiment, the terminal sends the target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix W to the access network device based on the reference signal sent by the access network device through the multiple antenna port groups, so that the access network device according to the target indication The information determines the specific process of the target precoding matrix W. As shown in FIG. 2, the method includes the following steps:
S101:接入网设备通过多个天线端口组向终端发送信息。S101: The access network device sends information to the terminal by using multiple antenna port groups.
可选的,该信息可以为下行参考信号。Optionally, the information may be a downlink reference signal.
S102:终端基于接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送的参考信号获得目标预编码矩阵。S102: The terminal obtains a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device through multiple antenna port groups.
具体的,本实施例中,接入网设备具有多个天线端口组,每个天线端口组包括一个或者多个端口。可选的,接入网设备可以具有多个天线面板,这多个天线面板之间的间距可以相等,也可以不相等,本实施例对此并不做限定。可选的,本申请中,该天线端口可以是用于传输beamformed CSI-RS信号的beamformed CSI-RS天线端口,一个beamformed CSI-RS天线端口可以对应一个波束,每个天线面板可以通过改变波束权值形成指向多个方向的多个波束,多个波束对应于多个不同的beamformed CSI-RS天线端口。Specifically, in this embodiment, the access network device has multiple antenna port groups, and each antenna port group includes one or more ports. Optionally, the access network device may have multiple antenna panels, and the spacing between the multiple antenna panels may be equal or not equal, which is not limited in this embodiment. Optionally, in this application, the antenna port may be a beamformed CSI-RS antenna port for transmitting a beamformed CSI-RS signal, and a beamformed CSI-RS antenna port may correspond to one beam, and each antenna panel may change a beam right. The values form a plurality of beams directed in multiple directions, the plurality of beams corresponding to a plurality of different beamformed CSI-RS antenna ports.
当接入网设备需要对下行数据进行预编码时,可选的,接入网设备通过多个天线端口组向终端发送下行参考信号。当终端设备接收到接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送的参考信号后,基于这些参考信号进行信道估计,得到测量结果H,该H为信道矩阵。然后,终端可以对该H进行SVD分解得到特征矢量(即酉矩阵V),然后将该特征矢量和码本中的各个预编码矩阵进行对比,选择与该特征矢量最接近的预编码矩阵作为目标预编码矩阵。When the access network device needs to perform precoding on the downlink data, optionally, the access network device sends the downlink reference signal to the terminal through multiple antenna port groups. After receiving the reference signal sent by the access network device through the multiple antenna port groups, the terminal device performs channel estimation based on the reference signals to obtain a measurement result H, where the H is a channel matrix. Then, the terminal may perform SVD decomposition on the H to obtain a feature vector (ie, a unitary matrix V), and then compare the feature vector with each precoding matrix in the codebook, and select a precoding matrix closest to the feature vector as a target. Precoding matrix.
S103:终端根据码本确定所述目标预编码矩阵对应的目标指示信息,所述码本包括预编码矩阵与指示信息的对应关系,所述预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,其中,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组的部分或全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵;S103: The terminal determines target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix according to the codebook, where the codebook includes a correspondence between a precoding matrix and the indication information, where the precoding matrix is a product of the first matrix and the second matrix. The first matrix is configured to select a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or to characterize a difference parameter between the multiple antenna port groups, where the second matrix includes the multiple a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to some or all of the antenna port groups of the antenna port group;
S104:终端向接入网设备发送所述目标指示信息。S104: The terminal sends the target indication information to the access network device.
具体的,当终端设备获得目标预编码矩阵后,可以根据终端设备侧预设的码本,确定该目标预编码矩阵对应的目标指示信息,该目标指示信息可以为目标预编码矩阵对应的码本索引,或者PMI。Specifically, after the terminal device obtains the target precoding matrix, the target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix may be determined according to the preset codebook of the terminal device side, where the target indication information may be the codebook corresponding to the target precoding matrix. Index, or PMI.
需要说明的是,终端设备侧预设的码本为本申请提供的新的码本。可选的,该新的码本可以是以码本索引和预编码矩阵之间的对应关系的形式体现,还可以通过表格的形式体现。该新的码本中包括多个预编码矩阵,每个预编码矩阵对应一个指示信息。该码本中的每个预编码矩阵可以包括第一矩阵和第二矩阵二者的积,可选的,这里的“每个预编码矩阵可以包括第一矩阵和第二矩阵二者的积”可以是每个预编码矩阵等于第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,还可以是第一矩阵、第二矩阵与其他矩阵或者其他参数之间的积,这里的“积”可以 是第一矩阵和第二矩阵二者的乘积,还可以是第一矩阵和第二矩阵的克罗内克积,总之,本申请所提供的新的码本中的一个预编码矩阵可以被拆分为第一矩阵和第二矩阵,或者被拆分成更多的矩阵。It should be noted that the preset codebook on the terminal device side is the new codebook provided by the application. Optionally, the new codebook may be embodied in the form of a correspondence between the codebook index and the precoding matrix, and may also be embodied in the form of a table. The new codebook includes a plurality of precoding matrices, and each precoding matrix corresponds to one indication information. Each precoding matrix in the codebook may include a product of both the first matrix and the second matrix. Alternatively, "each precoding matrix may include a product of both the first matrix and the second matrix". It may be that each precoding matrix is equal to the product of the first matrix and the second matrix, and may also be a product between the first matrix, the second matrix and other matrices or other parameters, where the "product" may be the first matrix and The product of the second matrix may also be the Kronecker product of the first matrix and the second matrix. In summary, one precoding matrix in the new codebook provided by the present application may be split into the first matrix. And the second matrix, or split into more matrices.
上述第一矩阵用于从接入网设备的多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征接入网设备的多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,该第二矩阵包括接入网设备的多个天线端口组的部分或全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w,其中第二矩阵中的一个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w为该天线端口组class B码本中所对应的子预编码矩阵w。例如,假设该天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,则该天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w为classB的码本中4天线端口的码本中的一个预编码矩阵。The first matrix is configured to select a first antenna port group from a plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device or to identify a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to a part or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups of the network device, wherein the sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to one antenna port group in the second matrix is the antenna port group class B codebook The sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to it. For example, if the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group is 4, the sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to the antenna port group is a precoding matrix in the codebook of the 4-antenna port in the codebook of classB.
可选的,上述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数可以是多个天线端口组各自对应的无线信道之间的相位差,该相位差指的是无线信道的频域冲击响应之间的相位差;可选的,该差异参数还可以是能够表征上述多个天线端口组之间的其他差异的参数,例如幅度差异等等。当上述第一矩阵用于从接入网设备的多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组时,即终端设备确定的目标预编码矩阵W实际上仅对应了第一天线端口组,减少了天线端口组之间的差异性带来的波束精度下降的问题,这样使得接入网设备在利用该针对一个第一天线端口组的目标预编码矩阵W进行下行数据处理时,其波束指向性明确,不会产生过多的波束旁瓣。Optionally, the difference parameter between the multiple antenna port groups may be a phase difference between respective wireless channels of the multiple antenna port groups, where the phase difference refers to a phase between frequency domain impulse responses of the wireless channel. Poorly; optionally, the difference parameter may also be a parameter capable of characterizing other differences between the plurality of antenna port groups, such as amplitude differences and the like. When the first matrix is used to select the first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, that is, the target precoding matrix W determined by the terminal device actually only corresponds to the first antenna port group, which is reduced. The problem of the beam accuracy degradation caused by the difference between the antenna port groups, so that the access network device uses the target precoding matrix W for a first antenna port group for downlink data processing, and the beam directivity is clear Does not produce excessive beam side lobes.
S105:接入网设备接收终端上报的信道状态信息,所述信道状态信息包括目标指示信息。S105: The access network device receives channel state information reported by the terminal, where the channel state information includes target indication information.
S106:接入网设备根据码本确定所述目标指示信息对应的目标预编码矩阵W。S106: The access network device determines, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix W corresponding to the target indication information.
具体的,对于接入网设备和终端而言,二者均存储了本申请提供的新的码本。因此基于该新的码本,当接入网设备接收到终端发送的信道状态信息之后,基于该信道状态信息中的目标指示信息,从新的码本中确定该目标预编码矩阵W,进而利用该目标预编码矩阵W对下行数据进行预编码处理,以提升系统的性能。Specifically, for the access network device and the terminal, both store the new codebook provided by the present application. Therefore, based on the new codebook, after the access network device receives the channel state information sent by the terminal, determining the target precoding matrix W from the new codebook based on the target indication information in the channel state information, and further utilizing the The target precoding matrix W precodes the downlink data to improve the performance of the system.
由上述描述可知,目标预编码矩阵W考虑了天线端口组之间的差异参数,或者,该目标预编码矩阵W可以为针对一个第一天线端口组的预编码矩阵,因此,即使接入网设备存在多个天线面板,且多个天线面板阵列间距不均匀时,本申请通过这两种方式均能够修正多个波束的指向性,避免产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。It can be seen from the above description that the target precoding matrix W considers the difference parameter between the antenna port groups, or the target precoding matrix W can be a precoding matrix for one first antenna port group, and therefore, even the access network device When there are multiple antenna panels, and the spacing of the multiple antenna panel arrays is not uniform, the present application can correct the directivity of multiple beams by using both methods, avoiding excessive side lobes, and improving the beam shaping gain. Increased the capacity of the antenna.
在上述实施例的基础上,进一步地,参见图2a所示的信息的传输方法实施例的信令流程图。如图2a所示,在上述S101之前,该方法包括:Based on the above embodiments, further, refer to the signaling flowchart of the embodiment of the method for transmitting information shown in FIG. 2a. As shown in FIG. 2a, before the above S101, the method includes:
S201:接入网设备向所述终端发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端采用所述码本。S201: The access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook.
S202:终端从所述接入网设备接收第一配置信息。S202: The terminal receives the first configuration information from the access network device.
具体的,接入网设备在通过多个天线端口组下发参考信号之后,可以向终端发送第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置所述终端采用所述码本,即告知终端要使用哪一个码本确定目标预编码矩阵。可选的,本实施例中,相同的天线端口数下对应多套新的码本(即本申请提供的码本),接入网设备可以基于自身发送参考信号的天线端口数确定自身所选择的码本,然后通过第一配置信息提前告知终端自己所选择的码本,这样使得终端设备在 得到信道测量结果H并对其进行SVD分解后,可以结合分解的结果(即酉矩阵V),可以直接从第一配置信息所指示码本中查找与该酉矩阵相关度最高的预编码矩阵作为目标预编码矩阵W,从而结合该目标预编码矩阵W以及该码本,确定该目标预编码矩阵W对应在码本中的目标指示信息。故而,该实施例避免了接入网设备基于目标指示信息从所有新的码本中查找目标预编码矩阵W,而是具有针对性的直接从第一配置信息指示的码本中确定该目标预编码矩阵W,提高了目标预编矩阵的查找效率。Specifically, the access network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal after the reference signal is sent by using the multiple antenna port groups, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook, that is, the terminal is notified Which codebook is used to determine the target precoding matrix. Optionally, in this embodiment, the same number of antenna ports corresponds to multiple sets of new codebooks (that is, the codebook provided by the present application), and the access network device may determine the number of antenna ports based on the number of antenna ports on which the reference signal is transmitted. The codebook then informs the terminal of the selected codebook in advance through the first configuration information, so that the terminal device can combine the decomposition result (ie, the matrix V) after obtaining the channel measurement result H and performing SVD decomposition on the terminal device. The precoding matrix with the highest correlation with the unitary matrix may be directly searched from the codebook indicated by the first configuration information as the target precoding matrix W, thereby combining the target precoding matrix W and the codebook to determine the target precoding matrix. W corresponds to the target indication information in the codebook. Therefore, the embodiment avoids that the access network device searches for the target precoding matrix W from all the new codebooks based on the target indication information, but specifically determines the target preamble directly from the codebook indicated by the first configuration information. The coding matrix W improves the search efficiency of the target pre-compiled matrix.
可选的,在上述S101之前,该实施例还可以包括S203和S204的步骤,可选的,该S203和S204可以位于S202之后执行,还可以与S201和S202并行执行。Optionally, before the foregoing S101, the embodiment may further include the steps of S203 and S204. Alternatively, the S203 and S204 may be performed after S202, and may also be performed in parallel with S201 and S202.
S203:接入网设备向所述终端发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数。S203: The access network device sends second configuration information to the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
可选的,所述第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。Optionally, the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
S204:终端从所述接入网设备接收第二配置信息。S204: The terminal receives the second configuration information from the access network device.
具体的,在上述S101之前,接入网设备向终端设备发送第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数,例如配置码本对应的天线端口数等。可选的,该第二配置信息可以包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。Specifically, before the foregoing S101, the access network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to configure the parameters of the codebook, for example, the number of antenna ports corresponding to the configuration codebook. Optionally, the second configuration information may include the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
可选的,上述第二配置信息中所包括的内容在不同的场景下可能有一些差异,下述分别对两种场景进行介绍:Optionally, the content included in the second configuration information may be different in different scenarios. The following describes the two scenarios:
第一种场景:接入网设备的多块天线面板形成的多个波束(即beamformed CSI-RS天线端口)可以组合在一起,其多占的资源构成一个CSI-RS资源。假设接入网设备的天线面板数为N,即接入网设备上的天线端口组数为N,每个天线端口组中的天线端口数等于M,则接入网设备共有M*N个天线端口(数目和),其可以对应本申请提供的码本中的一个长度为M*N的预编码矩阵,因此需要基于一个长度为MN的码本进行指示信息的反馈。In the first scenario, multiple beams formed by multiple antenna panels of the access network device (ie, beamformed CSI-RS antenna ports) may be combined, and the resources occupied by the multiple components constitute one CSI-RS resource. Assume that the number of antenna panels of the access network device is N, that is, the number of antenna port groups on the access network device is N, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is equal to M, then the access network device has M*N antennas. A port (number sum), which may correspond to a precoding matrix of length M*N in the codebook provided by the present application, and therefore needs to perform feedback of indication information based on a codebook of length MN.
第二种场景:接入网设备上的一个天线面板形成的多个波束(即beamformed CSI-RS天线端口)可以组合在一起,其所占的资源形成一个CSI-RS资源。假设天线面板数为N,即接入网设备上的天线端口组数为N,每个天线端口组中的beamformed CSI-RS天线端口数等于M,因此,共有N个CSI-RS资源。基于这N个CSI-RS资源对应的天线端口所发送的CSI-RS信号可以联合起来进行CSI测量,对应一个长度为M*N的预编码矩阵,使用一个长度为M*N的码本进行PMI反馈。The second scenario: multiple beams formed by one antenna panel on the access network device (ie, beamformed CSI-RS antenna ports) can be combined, and the resources occupied by the access network form a CSI-RS resource. Assume that the number of antenna panels is N, that is, the number of antenna port groups on the access network device is N, and the number of beamformed CSI-RS antenna ports in each antenna port group is equal to M. Therefore, there are a total of N CSI-RS resources. The CSI-RS signals transmitted by the antenna ports corresponding to the N CSI-RS resources may be combined to perform CSI measurement, corresponding to a precoding matrix of length M*N, and a codebook of length M*N is used for PMI. Feedback.
基于上述第一种场景,该第二配置信息包括接入网设备上天线端口组的总个数(N)和每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数。结合第一种场景的描述,接入网设备可以基于该接入网设备上的天线端口的总数确定自身所需使用的码本,然后通过第一配置信息告知给终端,使得终端基于接入网设备通过接入网设备的所有天线端口组下发的参考信号进行信道估计,估计出的信道矩阵H包括了所有天线端口对应的信道信息。然后终端基于该信道矩阵H,从接入网设备告知的码本中的选择该信道矩阵H对应的目标预编码矩阵W。需要说明的是,该目标预编码矩阵W可以等于第一矩阵和第二矩阵的乘积,还可以等于第一矩阵和第二矩阵的克罗内克积。在第一种场景下,该第一矩阵用于从接入网设备的所有天线端口组中选择出一个天线端口组,称为第一天线端口组,上述第二矩阵包括接入网设备的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,这里的子预编码矩阵w可以参见上述实施例一的 描述,即一个子预编码矩阵w实际上为接入网设备的一个天线端口组对应在现有class B码本中的一个预编码矩阵w,这样N个子预编码矩阵w就可以构成一个第二矩阵。Based on the foregoing first scenario, the second configuration information includes a total number of antenna port groups (N) on the access network device and a number of antenna ports in each antenna port group. In combination with the description of the first scenario, the access network device may determine, according to the total number of antenna ports on the access network device, the codebook that is required to be used by the access network device, and then notify the terminal by using the first configuration information, so that the terminal is based on the access network. The device performs channel estimation by using reference signals sent by all antenna port groups of the access network device, and the estimated channel matrix H includes channel information corresponding to all antenna ports. The terminal then selects the target precoding matrix W corresponding to the channel matrix H from the codebook notified by the access network device based on the channel matrix H. It should be noted that the target precoding matrix W may be equal to the product of the first matrix and the second matrix, and may also be equal to the Kronecker product of the first matrix and the second matrix. In the first scenario, the first matrix is used to select one antenna port group from all antenna port groups of the access network device, which is called a first antenna port group, and the second matrix includes each access network device. For the sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the antenna port group, the sub-precoding matrix w can be referred to the description of the first embodiment, that is, one sub-precoding matrix w is actually an antenna port group of the access network device corresponding to the existing one. Class B A precoding matrix w in the codebook, such that the N subprecoding matrices w can form a second matrix.
基于上述第二种场景,该第二配置信息包括:上述实施例一的所述部分天线端口组的个数S和这S个天线端口组中每个天线端口组的天线端口的个数。结合第二种场景的描述,接入网设备可以基于该接入网设备确定的S个天线端口组的天线端口的总数确定自身所需使用的码本,然后通过第一配置信息告知给终端,使得终端基于接入网设备通过这S个天线端口组下发的参考信号进行信道估计,估计出的信道矩阵H包括了这S个天线端口组中所有天线端口对应的信道信息。然后终端基于该信道矩阵H,从接入网设备告知的码本中的选择该信道矩阵H对应的目标预编码矩阵W。需要说明的是,该目标预编码矩阵W可以等于第一矩阵和第二矩阵的乘积,还可以等于第一矩阵和第二矩阵的克罗内克积。该第一矩阵用于表征所述S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差。上述第二矩阵包括接入网设备的S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w,这里的子预编码矩阵w可以参见上述实施例一的描述,即一个子预编码矩阵w实际上为接入网设备的一个天线端口组对应在现有class B码本中的一个预编码矩阵w,这样S个子预编码矩阵w就可以构成一个第二矩阵。Based on the foregoing second scenario, the second configuration information includes: the number S of the partial antenna port groups of the first embodiment and the number of antenna ports of each of the S antenna port groups. In combination with the description of the second scenario, the access network device may determine, according to the total number of antenna ports of the S antenna port groups determined by the access network device, the codebook that is required to be used by the access network device, and then notify the terminal by using the first configuration information. The channel is estimated based on the reference signals sent by the access network device through the S antenna port groups, and the estimated channel matrix H includes channel information corresponding to all antenna ports in the S antenna port groups. The terminal then selects the target precoding matrix W corresponding to the channel matrix H from the codebook notified by the access network device based on the channel matrix H. It should be noted that the target precoding matrix W may be equal to the product of the first matrix and the second matrix, and may also be equal to the Kronecker product of the first matrix and the second matrix. The first matrix is configured to characterize a phase difference between wireless channels corresponding to each antenna port group in the S antenna port groups. The second matrix includes the sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the access network device. For the sub-precoding matrix w, refer to the description of the first embodiment, that is, a sub-precoding matrix w is actually connected. One antenna port group of the network access device corresponds to a precoding matrix w in the existing class B codebook, so that the S sub-precoding matrices w can form a second matrix.
可选的,本申请提供的新的码本中的指示信息可以包括两个PMI,上述目标指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,该PMI可以为码本中的码本索引,该第一PMI用于指示第一矩阵,第二PMI用于指示第二矩阵。Optionally, the indication information in the new codebook provided by the application may include two PMIs, where the target indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, where the PMI may be a codebook index in the codebook. The first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
上述介绍了两种不同的场景下第二配置信息的内容,以及目标预编码矩阵W的确定过程,下述分别从不同的场景,分别介绍不同的场景下,目标预编码矩阵的结构。The content of the second configuration information in the two different scenarios and the process of determining the target precoding matrix W are described. The following describes the structure of the target precoding matrix in different scenarios from different scenarios.
1、第一种场景下:1. In the first scenario:
该场景下,目标预编码矩阵W可以拆分为一两级矩阵,还可以拆分为一三级矩阵,参见下述几种可能的实施方式。另外,下述几种实施方式中,均是以目标预编码矩阵W为拆分为两级矩阵为例,三级矩阵的结构可以参见之后的实施例:In this scenario, the target precoding matrix W can be split into a two-level matrix, and can also be split into a three-level matrix. See the following possible implementation manners. In addition, in the following embodiments, the target precoding matrix W is divided into two levels of matrix as an example. For the structure of the third-level matrix, refer to the following embodiments:
(1)第一种可能的实施方式:第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000046
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000047
所述 目标预编码矩阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000048
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000049
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000050
的矩阵(即
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000051
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000052
行1列的矩阵,其第k+1个元素为1,其余元素为0,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000053
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000054
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
(1) a first possible implementation manner: the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used Selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000046
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000047
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000048
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000049
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000050
Matrix (ie
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000051
Yes
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000052
a matrix of row 1 columns, the k+1th element is 1 and the remaining elements are 0, the k is equal to any value in j 1 , j 2 ... j N , an element in the first matrix 1 is, the other elements are all 0, the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000053
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000054
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
具体的,本实施方式中,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000055
可以被拆分为两级矩阵,分别是第一矩阵和第二矩阵,该第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,将第一矩阵和第二矩阵相乘,即相当于从接入网设备的所有天线端口组中选择出一个天线端口组,所得到的目标预编码矩阵W为针对第一矩阵选择出的第一天线端口组对应的预编码矩阵。可选的,上述第一PMI的值决定了a 1,a 2...a N的值,上述第二PMI的值决定了j 1,j 2...j N的值,可选的,第一PMI可以包括多个值,第二PMI也可以包括多个值。
Specifically, in the embodiment, the target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000055
It can be split into two levels of matrix, which are a first matrix and a second matrix. One element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0. Multiplying the first matrix and the second matrix is equivalent to An antenna port group is selected from all antenna port groups of the access network device, and the obtained target precoding matrix W is a precoding matrix corresponding to the first antenna port group selected for the first matrix. Optionally, the value of the first PMI determines a value of a 1 , a 2 ... a N , and the value of the second PMI determines a value of j 1 , j 2 . . . N N , optionally, The first PMI may include multiple values, and the second PMI may also include multiple values.
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000056
其中a 1,a 2的取值可以是{0,1},a 1,a 2中仅有一个为1。W 2为第二矩阵,W 1为第一矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000057
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000058
分别为两个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即a 1,a 2的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j 1和j 2的值可以由第二PMI确定,j 1可以等于 j 2,也可以不等于j 2。可选的,该第二PMI可以是一种子带PMI。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000056
Where a 1 , a 2 may have a value of {0, 1}, and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1. W 2 is a second matrix, and W 1 is a first matrix.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000057
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000058
The sub precoding matrices w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1 , a 2 is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, that is, the values of j 1 and j 2 may be determined by the second PMI, and j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 . Optionally, the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
针对上述例子,可选的,其对应的码本结构可以为表1所示,该表1中所示的码本结构为本申请所提供的新的码本。For the above example, optionally, the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 1. The codebook structure shown in Table 1 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000059
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000059
表1中,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000060
对应的第一PMI为i 1,1,i 1,2,对应的第二PMI为i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3。即,该例子中,第一PMI包括两个值,分别是i 1,1,i 1,2,第二PMI包括三个值,分别是i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,并且i 2,3与接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000061
对应。其中,i 1,1等于第一矩阵中a 1元素的值,i 1,2等于第一矩阵中a 2元素的值,且a 1,a 2中仅有一个为1,i 2,1等于j 1,i 2,2等于j 2
Table 1, target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000060
The corresponding first PMI is i 1,1 , i 1,2 , and the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 . That is, in this example, the first PMI includes two values, namely i 1,1 , i 1,2 , and the second PMI includes three values, namely i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 And the phase difference between i 2, 3 and the two polarized antennas on the access network device
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000061
correspond. Where i 1,1 is equal to the value of the a 1 element in the first matrix, i 1,2 is equal to the value of the a 2 element in the first matrix, and only one of a 1 , a 2 is 1, i 2 , 1 is equal to j 1 , i 2 , 2 is equal to j 2
结合上述表1中所示的码本,假设终端设备确定目标预编码矩阵W的第一PMI i 1,1等于0,i 1,2等于1,目标预编码矩阵W的第二PMI为i 2,1等于0,i 2,2等于1,i 2,3等于1
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000062
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000063
则接入网可以根据上述表1所示的码本,确定目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000064
In combination with the codebook shown in Table 1 above, it is assumed that the terminal device determines that the first PMI i 1,1 of the target precoding matrix W is equal to 0, i 1,2 is equal to 1, and the second PMI of the target precoding matrix W is i 2 , 1 is equal to 0, i 2 , 2 is equal to 1, i 2 , 3 is equal to 1
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000062
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000063
The access network may determine the target precoding matrix according to the codebook shown in Table 1 above.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000064
由上述描述可知,本实施方式中的目标预编码矩阵W中由于第一矩阵中的元素的值的限定,该目标预编码矩阵W为针对第一矩阵选择出的第一天线端口组对应的预编码矩阵,因此,减少了天线端口组之间的差异性带来的波束精度下降的问题,这样使得接入网设备在利用该针对一个第一天线端口组的目标预编码矩阵W进行下行数据处理时,其波束指向性明确,不会产生过多的波束旁瓣。It can be seen from the above description that, in the target precoding matrix W in the present embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is a preamble corresponding to the first antenna port group selected for the first matrix due to the limitation of the value of the element in the first matrix. The coding matrix, therefore, reduces the problem of beam accuracy degradation caused by the difference between antenna port groups, so that the access network device performs downlink data processing using the target precoding matrix W for a first antenna port group When the beam directivity is clear, there will be no excessive beam side lobes.
(2)第二种可能的实施方式:第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选 择第一天线端口组;所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000065
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000066
所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000067
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000068
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000069
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值;所述I M表示长度为M×M的单位矩阵;{a 1,a 2...a N}中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的总个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000070
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000071
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
(2) a second possible implementation manner: the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used Selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000065
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000066
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000067
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000068
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000069
a matrix, the k being equal to any of j 1 , j 2 ... j N ; the I M representing an identity matrix of length M × M; {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } One element is 1, and all other elements are 0. The N is the total number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group. Description
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000070
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000071
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
具体的,本实施方式中,目标预编码矩阵W与上述第一种可能的实施方式中的目标预编码矩阵相同,均为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000072
该实施方式中,目标预编码矩阵W也被拆分为两级矩阵。与上述第一种可能的实施方式不同的是,本实施方式中,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000073
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000074
I M表示长度为M×M的单位矩阵。第一矩阵中{a 1,a 2...a N}中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,可选的,上述第一PMI的值决定了a 1,a 2...a N的值,上述第二PMI的值决定了j 1,j 2...j N的值,可选的,第一PMI可以包括多个值,第二PMI也可以包括多个值。
Specifically, in the embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is the same as the target precoding matrix in the first possible implementation manner, and both are
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000072
In this embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is also split into a two-level matrix. Different from the first possible implementation manner described above, in the embodiment, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000073
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000074
I M denotes an identity matrix of length M × M. One element in {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } in the first matrix is 1, and all other elements are 0. Alternatively, the value of the first PMI determines a 1 , a 2 ...a The value of N , the value of the second PMI determines the value of j 1 , j 2 ... j N . Optionally, the first PMI may include multiple values, and the second PMI may also include multiple values.
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000075
其中a 1,a 2的取值可以是{0,1},a 1,a 2中仅有一个为1。W 2为第二矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000076
W 1为第一矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000077
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000078
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000079
分别为两个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即a 1,a 2的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j 1和j 2的值可以由第二PMI确定,j 1可以等于j 2,也可以不等于j 2。可选的,该第二PMI可以是一种子带PMI。该例子中的目标预编码矩阵W即上述表1所示的码本结构,接入网设备能够根据终端设备上报的第一PMI和第二PMI,从表1所示的码本结构中确定目标预编码矩阵W。本实施方式中,关于第一PMI、第二PMI与表1中的i 1,1,i 1,2,i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3之间的对应关系,参见上述第一种可能的实施方式,在此不再赘述。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000075
Where a 1 , a 2 may have a value of {0, 1}, and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1. W 2 is the second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000076
W 1 is the first matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000077
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000078
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000079
The sub precoding matrices w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1 , a 2 is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, that is, the values of j 1 and j 2 may be determined by the second PMI, and j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 . Optionally, the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI. The target precoding matrix W in this example is the codebook structure shown in Table 1, and the access network device can determine the target from the codebook structure shown in Table 1 according to the first PMI and the second PMI reported by the terminal device. Precoding matrix W. In the present embodiment, regarding the correspondence between the first PMI, the second PMI, and i 1,1 , i 1,2 , i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 in Table 1, see the above The first possible implementation manner will not be described here.
该实施方式下的目标预编码矩阵W中由于第一矩阵中a 1,a 2...a N的元素的值的限定,使得该目标预编码矩阵W为针对第一矩阵选择出的第一天线端口组对应的预编码矩阵,因此,减少了天线端口组之间的差异性带来的波束精度下降的问题,这样使得接入网设备在利用该针对一个第一天线端口组的目标预编码矩阵W进行下行数据处理时,其波束指向性明确,不会产生过多的波束旁瓣。 In the target precoding matrix W in this embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is the first selected for the first matrix due to the definition of the values of the elements of a 1 , a 2 ... a N in the first matrix. The precoding matrix corresponding to the antenna port group, thereby reducing the problem of beam accuracy degradation caused by the difference between the antenna port groups, so that the access network device utilizes the target precoding for a first antenna port group When the matrix W performs downlink data processing, its beam directivity is clear, and excessive beam side lobes are not generated.
(3)第三种可能的实施方式:第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000080
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000081
所述目标预编码矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000082
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000083
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000084
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1;所述I M表示长度为M×M的单位矩阵;{a 1,a 2...a N}中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的总个数,所述M为每 个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000085
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000086
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1根据所述第二PMI确定。
(3) a third possible implementation manner: the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used Selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000080
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000081
The target precoding matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000082
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000083
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000084
a matrix, the k is equal to j 1 ; the I M represents an identity matrix of length M × M; one element in {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is 1, and all other elements are 0, N is the total number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000085
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000086
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 according to the first Two PMI confirmed.
具体的,本实施方式中,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000087
其也被拆分为两级矩阵,与上述第一种可能的实施方式不同的是,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000088
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000089
I M表示长度为M×M的单位矩阵。第一矩阵中{a 1,a 2...a N}中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,可选的,上述第一PMI的值决定了a 1,a 2...a N的值,上述第二PMI的值决定了j 1的值,可选的,第一PMI可以包括多个值,第二PMI也可以包括多个值。
Specifically, in the embodiment, the target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000087
It is also split into a two-level matrix. Unlike the first possible implementation described above, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000088
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000089
I M denotes an identity matrix of length M × M. One element in {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } in the first matrix is 1, and all other elements are 0. Alternatively, the value of the first PMI determines a 1 , a 2 ...a The value of N , the value of the second PMI determines the value of j 1 . Optionally, the first PMI may include multiple values, and the second PMI may also include multiple values.
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000090
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000091
其中a 1,a 2的取值可以是{0,1},a 1,a 2中仅有一个为1。W 1为第一矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000092
W 2为第二矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000093
该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即a 1,a 2的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j的值可以由第二PMI确定。可选的,该第二PMI可以是一种子带PMI。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000090
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000091
Where a 1 , a 2 may have a value of {0, 1}, and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1. W 1 is the first matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000092
W 2 is the second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000093
The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1 , a 2 is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie the value of j can be determined by the second PMI. Optionally, the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
该实施方式下,也对应和表1类似的码本结构,接入网设备和终端设备上均预设该码本结构,这样当终端设备上报了第一PMI和第二PMI时,接入网设备就可以基于这两个指示信息进行出目标预编码矩阵W,其和上述第一种可能的实施方式所举的例子中确定目标预编码矩阵W的方式类似。In this embodiment, the codebook structure is similar to that in Table 1. The codebook structure is preset on the access network device and the terminal device, so that when the terminal device reports the first PMI and the second PMI, the access network The device can then perform the target precoding matrix W based on the two indications, which is similar to the manner in which the target precoding matrix W is determined in the example of the first possible implementation.
该实施方式下的目标预编码矩阵W中由于第一矩阵中a 1,a 2...a N的元素的值的限定, 使得该目标预编码矩阵W为针对第一矩阵选择出的第一天线端口组对应的预编码矩阵,因此,减少了天线端口组之间的差异性带来的波束精度下降的问题,这样使得接入网设备在利用该针对一个第一天线端口组的目标预编码矩阵W进行下行数据处理时,其波束指向性明确,不会产生过多的波束旁瓣。 In the target precoding matrix W in this embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is the first selected for the first matrix due to the definition of the values of the elements of a 1 , a 2 ... a N in the first matrix. The precoding matrix corresponding to the antenna port group, thereby reducing the problem of beam accuracy degradation caused by the difference between the antenna port groups, so that the access network device utilizes the target precoding for a first antenna port group When the matrix W performs downlink data processing, its beam directivity is clear, and excessive beam side lobes are not generated.
2、第二种场景,2, the second scenario,
该场景下,目标预编码矩阵W的结构可以拆分为一两级矩阵,还可以拆分为一三级矩阵,参见下述几种可能的实施方式,下述几种实施方式中,均是以目标预编码矩阵为拆分为两级矩阵为例,三级矩阵的结构可以参见之后的实施例:In this scenario, the structure of the target precoding matrix W can be split into a two-level matrix, and can also be split into a three-level matrix. See the following possible implementation manners. Taking the target precoding matrix as a two-level matrix as an example, the structure of the three-level matrix can be seen in the following embodiments:
(1)第一种可能的实施方式:第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,上述实施例中的差异参数指的是该第一矩阵所表征的多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差。该第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000094
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000095
所述目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000096
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000097
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000098
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于或等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的数量,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的数量,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000099
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000100
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000101
为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,X为集合{2,4,8,…}中的值,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
(1) The first possible implementation manner: the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the multiple antenna port groups The difference parameter between the corresponding wireless channels, the difference parameter in the above embodiment refers to the phase difference between the wireless channels corresponding to the plurality of antenna port groups characterized by the first matrix. The first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000094
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000095
Target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000096
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000097
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000098
a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S being less than or equal to N, the N being the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000099
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000100
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000101
For the phase difference between the corresponding radio channels of each antenna port in the S antenna port groups, l=1,...,X-1,X is the value in the set {2,4,8,...}, the X a number of quantization bits equal to θ, the l being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N being determined according to the second PMI.
具体的,本实施方式中,接入网设备上共有N个天线端口组,由于接入网设备告知终端选择S个天线端口组进行信道测量(S小于或等于N),因此,终端确定的目标预编码矩阵W是基于这S个天线端口组发送的参考信号确定的矩阵。该目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000102
可以被拆分为两级矩阵,分别是第一矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000103
和第二矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000104
由第一矩阵的结构可知,该第一矩阵表征了这S个天线端口组中各个天线端口对应的无线信道之间的相位差,即本实施方式中所确定的目标预编码矩阵W基于该相位差可以这S个天线端口组对应的波束进行修正,避免产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。可选的,上述第一PMI的值决定了l的值,l的值决定了θ的值,上述第二PMI的值决定了j 1,j 2...j N的值,可选的,第一PMI可以包括多个值,第二PMI也可以包括多个值。
Specifically, in this implementation manner, the access network device has a total of N antenna port groups, and the access network device instructs the terminal to select S antenna port groups for channel measurement (S is less than or equal to N), and therefore, the target determined by the terminal The precoding matrix W is a matrix determined based on reference signals transmitted by the S antenna port groups. Target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000102
Can be split into two levels of matrix, respectively the first matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000103
And second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000104
It can be known from the structure of the first matrix that the first matrix represents the phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the antenna ports of the S antenna port groups, that is, the target precoding matrix W determined in this embodiment is based on the phase. The difference can be corrected by the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups, avoiding excessive side lobes, increasing the beam shaping gain, and thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna. Optionally, the value of the first PMI determines a value of l, the value of l determines a value of θ, and the value of the second PMI determines a value of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , optionally, The first PMI may include multiple values, and the second PMI may also include multiple values.
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000105
其中,W 2为第二矩阵,W 1为第一矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000106
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000107
分别为两个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即l的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j 1和j 2
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000108
的值可以由第二PMI确定,j 1可以等于j 2,也可以不等于j 2,该第二PMI可以是一种子带PMI。W 1中的θ也可以进行标量量化,(例如用X个值对θ进行量化),并作为调制符号承载在PUSCH上随路由终端反馈给接入网设备。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000105
Wherein W 2 is a second matrix, and W 1 is a first matrix.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000106
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000107
The sub precoding matrices w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie j 1 and j 2 and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000108
The value may be determined by the second PMI, j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 , and the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI. θ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing θ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal.
针对上述例子,可选的,其对应的码本结构可以为表2所示,该表2中所示的码本结构为本申请所提供的新的码本。For the above example, optionally, the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 2. The codebook structure shown in Table 2 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000109
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000109
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000110
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000110
表2中,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000111
对应的第一PMI为i 1,对应的第二PMI为i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3。即,该例子中,第一PMI即i 1,取值为0,1,2,3中的任一值,第二PMI包括三个值,分别是i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,并且i 2,3与接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000112
对应。其中,i 1的值等于l,l的值决定了θ的值,i 2,1等于j 1,i 2,2等于j 2。另外,上述i 1之所以取值可以是{0,1,2,3},其主要取决于θ的量化比特数X,i 1的最大值小于X;上述i 2,3之所以取值可以是{0,1,2,3},其主要取决于
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000113
的量化比特;上述i 2,1,i 2,2之所以取值可以是{0,1},其主要取决于一个极化方向上的天线端口数。
Table 2, target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000111
The corresponding first PMI is i 1 , and the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 . That is, in this example, the first PMI, i 1 , takes any value of 0, 1 , 2, 3, and the second PMI includes three values, namely i 2,1 , i 2,2 ,i Phase difference between 2,3 and i 2,3 and two polarized antennas on the access network device
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000112
correspond. Wherein, the value of i 1 is equal to 1, and the value of l determines the value of θ, i 2 , 1 is equal to j 1 , and i 2 , 2 is equal to j 2 . In addition, the value of the above i 1 may be {0, 1, 2, 3}, which mainly depends on the number of quantization bits X of θ, and the maximum value of i 1 is smaller than X; the value of the above i 2, 3 may be Is {0,1,2,3}, which depends mainly on
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000113
The quantization bit; the value of the above i 2,1 , i 2,2 may be {0, 1}, which mainly depends on the number of antenna ports in one polarization direction.
结合上述表2中所示的码本,假设终端设备确定目标预编码矩阵W的第一PMI i 1等于1,目标预编码矩阵W的第二PMI为i 2,1等于0,i 2,2等于1,i 2,3等于
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000114
则接入网可以根据上述表2所示的目标预编码矩阵W的通式,W中的l=i 1=1,j 1=i 2,1=i 2,1=0,j 1=i 2,2=1
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000115
确定目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000116
In combination with the codebook shown in Table 2 above, it is assumed that the terminal device determines that the first PMI i 1 of the target precoding matrix W is equal to 1, and the second PMI of the target precoding matrix W is i 2, 1 is equal to 0, i 2 , 2 Equal to 1, i 2 , 3 equals
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000114
Then, the access network can be based on the general formula of the target precoding matrix W shown in Table 2 above, where l=i 1 =1, j 1 =i 2,1 =i 2,1 =0,j 1 =i 2,2 =1
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000115
Determining the target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000116
结合上述描述,该目标预编码矩阵W中由于第一矩阵包含了S个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,其可以基于该相位差对这S个天线端口组对应的波束进行修正,避免产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。According to the foregoing description, in the target precoding matrix W, since the first matrix includes a phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the S antenna port groups, the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups may be corrected based on the phase difference. In order to avoid excessive side lobes, the beam shaping gain is increased, thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna.
(2)第二种可能的实施方式:第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000117
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000118
所述目标 预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000119
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000120
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000121
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于或等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备上天线端口组的数量,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的数量,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000122
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000123
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000124
为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,X为集合{2,4,8,…}中的值,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
(2) a second possible implementation manner: the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the multiple antenna port groups The phase difference between the corresponding wireless channels, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000117
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000118
Target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000119
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000120
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000121
a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S being less than or equal to N, the N being the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000122
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000123
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000124
For the phase difference between the corresponding radio channels of each antenna port in the S antenna port groups, l=1,...,X-1,X is the value in the set {2,4,8,...}, the X a number of quantization bits equal to θ, the l being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N being determined according to the second PMI.
具体的,本实施方式中,接入网设备上共有N个天线端口组,由于接入网设备告知终端选择S个天线端口组进行信道测量(S小于或等于N),因此,终端确定的目标预编码矩阵W是基于这S个天线端口组发送的参考信号确定的矩阵。本实施方式中,目标预编码矩阵W与上述第二种场景下第一种可能的实施方式中的目标预编码矩阵相同,均为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000125
该实施方式中,目标预编码矩阵W也被拆分为两级矩阵。与上述第一种可能的实施方式不同的是,本实施方式中,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000126
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000127
I M表示长度为M×M的单位矩阵。由第一矩阵的结构可知,该第一矩阵表征了这S个天线端口组中各个天线端口对应的无线信道之间的相位差,即本实施方式中所确定的目标预编码矩阵W基于该相位差可以这S个天线端口组对应的波束进行修正,避免产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。可选的,上述第一PMI的值决定了l的值,l的值决定了θ的值,上述第二PMI的值决定了j 1,j 2...j N的值,可选的,第一PMI可以包括多个值,第二PMI也可以包括多个值。
Specifically, in this implementation manner, the access network device has a total of N antenna port groups, and the access network device instructs the terminal to select S antenna port groups for channel measurement (S is less than or equal to N), and therefore, the target determined by the terminal The precoding matrix W is a matrix determined based on reference signals transmitted by the S antenna port groups. In this embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is the same as the target precoding matrix in the first possible implementation manner in the second scenario.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000125
In this embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is also split into a two-level matrix. Different from the first possible implementation manner described above, in the embodiment, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000126
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000127
I M denotes an identity matrix of length M × M. It can be known from the structure of the first matrix that the first matrix represents the phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the antenna ports of the S antenna port groups, that is, the target precoding matrix W determined in this embodiment is based on the phase. The difference can be corrected by the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups, avoiding excessive side lobes, increasing the beam shaping gain, and thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna. Optionally, the value of the first PMI determines a value of l, the value of l determines a value of θ, and the value of the second PMI determines a value of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , optionally, The first PMI may include multiple values, and the second PMI may also include multiple values.
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端 口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000128
I 4表示4×4的单位矩阵,W 2为第二矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000129
W 1为第一矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000130
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000131
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000132
分别为两个天线端口组对应的第一子预编码矩阵w。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即l的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j 1和j 2
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000133
的值可以由第二PMI确定,j 1可以等于j 2,也可以不等于j 2,该第二PMI是一种子带PMI。W 1中的θ也可以进行标量量化,(例如用X个值对θ进行量化),并作为调制符号承载在PUSCH上随路由终端反馈给接入网设备。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000128
I 4 represents a 4×4 identity matrix, and W 2 is a second matrix.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000129
W 1 is the first matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000130
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000131
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000132
The first sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie j 1 and j 2 and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000133
The value may be determined by the second PMI, j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 , and the second PMI is a sub-band PMI. θ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing θ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal.
该例子中的目标预编码矩阵W即上述表2所示的码本结构,接入网设备能够根据终端设备上报的第一PMI和第二PMI,从表2所示的码本结构中确定目标预编码矩阵W。本实施方式中,关于第一PMI、第二PMI与表1中的i 1,i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3之间的对应关系,参见第二种场景下的第一种可能的实施方式,在此不再赘述。 The target precoding matrix W in this example is the codebook structure shown in Table 2 above. The access network device can determine the target from the codebook structure shown in Table 2 according to the first PMI and the second PMI reported by the terminal device. Precoding matrix W. In this embodiment, regarding the correspondence between the first PMI, the second PMI, and i 1 , i 2,1 , i 2 , 2 , i 2 , 3 in Table 1, refer to the first in the second scenario. A possible implementation manner will not be described herein.
该实施方式的目标预编码矩阵W中,由于第一矩阵包含了S个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,其可以基于该相位差对这S个天线端口组对应的波束进行修正,避免产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。In the target precoding matrix W of this embodiment, since the first matrix includes a phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the S antenna port groups, the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups can be corrected based on the phase difference. In order to avoid excessive side lobes, the beam shaping gain is increased, thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna.
(3)第三种可能的实施方式:第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000134
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000135
所述目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000136
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000137
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000138
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,所述S小于或等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备上天线端口组的数量,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的数量,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000139
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000140
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000141
为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,X为集合{2,4,8,…}中的值,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1根据所述第二PMI对应。
(3) a third possible implementation manner: the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the multiple antenna port groups The phase difference between the corresponding wireless channels, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000134
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000135
Target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000136
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000137
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000138
a matrix, the k is equal to j 1 , the S is less than or equal to N, the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group , said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000139
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000140
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000141
For the phase difference between the corresponding radio channels of each antenna port in the S antenna port groups, l=1,...,X-1,X is the value in the set {2,4,8,...}, the X a number of quantization bits equal to θ, the 1 being determined according to the first PMI, and the j 1 is corresponding according to the second PMI.
具体的,本实施方式中,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000142
其也被拆分为两级矩阵,与上述第一种可能的实施方式不同的是,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000143
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000144
I M表示长度为M×M的单位矩阵。由第一矩阵的结构可知,该第一矩阵表征了这S个天线端口组中各个天线端口对应的无线信道之间的相位差,即本实施方式中所确定的目标预编码矩阵W基于该相位差可以这S个天线端口组对应的波束进行修正,避免产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。可选的,上述第一PMI的值决定了l的值,l的值决定了θ的值,上述第二PMI的值决定了j 1的值,可选的,第一PMI可以包括多个值,第二PMI也可以包括多个值。
Specifically, in the embodiment, the target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000142
It is also split into a two-level matrix. Unlike the first possible implementation described above, the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000143
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000144
I M denotes an identity matrix of length M × M. It can be known from the structure of the first matrix that the first matrix represents the phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the antenna ports of the S antenna port groups, that is, the target precoding matrix W determined in this embodiment is based on the phase. The difference can be corrected by the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups, avoiding excessive side lobes, increasing the beam shaping gain, and thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna. Optionally, the value of the first PMI determines a value of l, the value of l determines a value of θ, and the value of the second PMI determines a value of j 1 . Optionally, the first PMI may include multiple values. The second PMI may also include multiple values.
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000145
W 1为第一矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000146
W 2为第二矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000147
该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即l的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j 1的值可以由第二PMI确定,该第二PMI是一种子带PMI。W 1中的θ也可以进行标量量化,(例如用X个值对θ进行量化),并作为调制符号承载在PUSCH上随路由终端反馈给接入网设备。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000145
W 1 is the first matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000146
W 2 is the second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000147
The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie the value of j 1 can be determined by the second PMI, which is a sub-band PMI. θ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing θ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal.
该实施方式下,也对应和表2类似的码本结构,接入网设备和终端设备上均预设该码本结构,这样当终端设备上报了第一PMI和第二PMI时,接入网设备就可以基于这两个指示信息进行出目标预编码矩阵W,其和上述第二种场景下第一种可能的实施方式所举的例子中确定目标预编码矩阵W的方式类似,在此不再赘述。In this embodiment, the codebook structure is similar to that in Table 2. The codebook structure is preset on the access network device and the terminal device, so that when the terminal device reports the first PMI and the second PMI, the access network The device can perform the target precoding matrix W based on the two indication information, which is similar to the method for determining the target precoding matrix W in the example of the first possible implementation manner in the second scenario. Let me repeat.
该实施方式的目标预编码矩阵W中,由于第一矩阵包含了S个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,其可以基于该相位差对这S个天线端口组对应的波束进行修正,避免产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。In the target precoding matrix W of this embodiment, since the first matrix includes a phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the S antenna port groups, the beam corresponding to the S antenna port groups can be corrected based on the phase difference. In order to avoid excessive side lobes, the beam shaping gain is increased, thereby increasing the capacity of the antenna.
综上所述,无论目标预编码矩阵W所拆分出来的第一矩阵是用于从接入网设备的多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组,还是用于表征所述S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,其均可以避免接入网设备的天线面板对应的波束产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。In summary, the first matrix split by the target precoding matrix W is used to select the first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, or to characterize the S antennas. The phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to each antenna port group in the port group can avoid excessive side lobes of the beam corresponding to the antenna panel of the access network device, thereby improving beamforming gain and increasing the antenna. Capacity.
作为本申请的另一种可能的实施方式,上述终端上报给接入网设备的信道状态信息还可以包括值为0的第三指示信息,因此,接入网设备可以基于上述第一PMI、第二PMI以及该值为0的第三指示信息,该第三指示信息可以为第三PMI,该第三PMI用于指示第三矩阵。从本申请提供的新的码本中确定目标预编码矩阵W。也就是说,本实施方式中,目标预编码矩阵W可以被拆分为三个矩阵,分别是第一矩阵、第二矩阵和第三矩阵的积,该第三矩阵为一单位阵,该单位矩阵的行数和列数均等于接入网设备的天线端口总数。As another possible implementation manner of the present application, the channel state information reported by the terminal to the access network device may further include third indication information with a value of 0. Therefore, the access network device may be based on the foregoing first PMI, The second PMI and the third indication information whose value is 0, the third indication information may be a third PMI, where the third PMI is used to indicate the third matrix. The target precoding matrix W is determined from the new codebook provided by the present application. That is to say, in the embodiment, the target precoding matrix W can be split into three matrices, which are respectively a product of the first matrix, the second matrix and the third matrix, and the third matrix is a unit matrix, the unit The number of rows and columns of the matrix are equal to the total number of antenna ports of the access network device.
故,结合上述第一种场景和第二种场景,下述几种可能的实现方式分别从两个场景出发,介绍目标预编码矩阵W可以被拆分为三级矩阵的具体情况:Therefore, in combination with the first scenario and the second scenario described above, the following possible implementation manners are respectively started from two scenarios, and the specific case where the target precoding matrix W can be split into three levels of matrix is introduced:
1、第一种场景1, the first scene
(1)第一种实现方式:(1) The first implementation:
该实现方式下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000148
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000149
该实现方式下的目标预编码矩阵W与上述第一种场景下的两级矩阵的W相同,参数解释也相同,在此不再赘述。其中,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000150
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000151
第三矩阵I MN为(M×N)×(M×N)的单位矩阵。
In this implementation,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000148
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000149
The target precoding matrix W in the implementation manner is the same as the W of the two-level matrix in the first scenario, and the parameter interpretation is the same, and details are not described herein again. Wherein the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000150
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000151
The third matrix I MN is an identity matrix of (M × N) × (M × N).
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000152
其中a 1,a 2的取值可以是{0,1},a 1,a 2中仅有一个为1。W 2为第二矩阵,W 1为第一矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000153
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000154
分别为两个天线端口组对应的第一子预编码矩阵w。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即a 1,a 2的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j 1和j 2的值可以由第二PMI确定,j 1可以等于j 2,也可以不等于j 2。可选的,该第二PMI可以是一种子带PMI。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000152
Where a 1 , a 2 may have a value of {0, 1}, and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1. W 2 is a second matrix, and W 1 is a first matrix.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000153
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000154
The first sub-precoding matrix w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1 , a 2 is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, that is, the values of j 1 and j 2 may be determined by the second PMI, and j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 . Optionally, the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
针对上述例子,可选的,其对应的码本结构可以为表3所示,该表3中所示的码本结构为本申请所提供的新的码本。For the above example, optionally, the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 3. The codebook structure shown in Table 3 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000155
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000155
表3中,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000156
对应的第一PMI为i 3,1,i 3,2,对应的第二PMI为i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,对应的第三指示信息为i 1。即,该例子中,第一PMI包括两个值,分别是i 3,1,i 3,2,第二PMI包括三个值,分别是i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,并且i 2,3与接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000157
对应。其中,i 3,1等于第一矩阵中a 1元素的值,i 3,2等于第一矩阵中a 2元素的值,且a 1,a 2中仅有一个为1,i 2,1等于j 1,i 2,2等于j 2
Table 3, target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000156
The corresponding first PMI is i 3,1 , i 3,2 , and the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 , and the corresponding third indication information is i 1 . That is, in this example, the first PMI includes two values, namely i 3,1 , i 3,2 , and the second PMI includes three values, namely i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 And the phase difference between i 2, 3 and the two polarized antennas on the access network device
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000157
correspond. Where i 3,1 is equal to the value of the a 1 element in the first matrix, i 3,2 is equal to the value of the a 2 element in the first matrix, and only one of a 1 , a 2 is 1, i 2 , 1 is equal to j 1 , i 2 , 2 is equal to j 2 .
(2)第二种实现方式:(2) The second implementation:
该实现方式下,In this implementation,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000158
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000159
该实现方式下的目标预编码矩阵W与上述第一种场景下的两级矩阵的W相同,参数解释也相同,在此不再赘述。其中,其中,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000160
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000161
第三矩阵I MN为(M×N)×(M×N)的单位矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000158
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000159
The target precoding matrix W in the implementation manner is the same as the W of the two-level matrix in the first scenario, and the parameter interpretation is the same, and details are not described herein again. Wherein the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000160
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000161
The third matrix I MN is an identity matrix of (M × N) × (M × N).
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000162
其中a 1,a 2的取值可以是{0,1},a 1,a 2中仅有一个为1。W 2为第二矩阵,W 1为第一矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000163
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000164
分别为两个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即a 1,a 2的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j 1和j 2的值可以由第二PMI确定,j 1可以等于j 2,也可以不等于j 2。可选的,该第二PMI可以是一种子带PMI。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000162
Where a 1 , a 2 may have a value of {0, 1}, and only one of a 1 and a 2 is 1. W 2 is a second matrix, and W 1 is a first matrix.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000163
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000164
The sub precoding matrices w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of a 1 , a 2 is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a sub-band PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, that is, the values of j 1 and j 2 may be determined by the second PMI, and j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 . Optionally, the second PMI may be a sub-band PMI.
针对上述例子,可选的,其也可以对应上述表3所示的码本结构,在此不再赘述。For the above example, optionally, it may also correspond to the codebook structure shown in Table 3 above, and details are not described herein again.
2、第二种场景2, the second scenario
(1)第一种实现方式:(1) The first implementation:
该实现方式下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000165
该实现方式下的目标预编码矩阵W与上述第二种场景下的两级矩阵的W相同,参数解释也相同,在此不再赘述。其中,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000166
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000167
第三矩阵I MN为(M×N)×(M×N)的单位矩阵。
In this implementation,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000165
The target precoding matrix W in the implementation manner is the same as the W of the two-level matrix in the second scenario, and the parameter interpretation is the same, and details are not described herein again. Wherein the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000166
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000167
The third matrix I MN is an identity matrix of (M × N) × (M × N).
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000168
其中,W 2为第二矩阵,W 1为第一矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000169
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000170
分别为两个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即l的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j 1和j 2
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000171
的值可以由第二PMI确定,j 1可以等于j 2,也可以不等于j 2,该第二PMI是一种子带PMI。W 1中的θ也可以进行标量量化,(例如用X个值对θ进行量化),并作为调制符号承载在PUSCH上随路由终端反馈给接入网设备。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000168
Wherein W 2 is a second matrix, and W 1 is a first matrix.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000169
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000170
The sub precoding matrices w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie j 1 and j 2 and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000171
The value may be determined by the second PMI, j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 , and the second PMI is a sub-band PMI. θ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing θ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal.
针对上述例子,可选的,其对应的码本结构可以为表4所示,该表4中所示的码本结构为本申请所提供的新的码本。For the above example, optionally, the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 4. The codebook structure shown in Table 4 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
表4Table 4
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000172
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000172
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000173
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000173
表4中,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000174
对应的第一PMI为i 3,对应的第二PMI为i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,对应的第三指示信息为i 1。即,该例子中,第一PMI即i 3,取值为0,1,2,3中的任一值,第二PMI包括三个值,分别是i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,并且i 2,3与接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000175
对应,i 1的值恒为0。其中,i 3的值等于l,l的值决定了θ的值,i 2,1等于j 1,i 2,2等于j 2。另外,上述i 3之所以取值可以是{0,1,2,3},其主要取决于θ的量化比特数X,i 3的最大值小于X;上述i 2,3之所以取值可以是{0,1,2,3},其主要取决于
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000176
的量化比特;上述i 2,1,i 2,2之所以取值可以是{0,1},其主要取决于一个极化方向上的天线端口数。
Table 4, target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000174
The corresponding first PMI is i 3 , the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 , and the corresponding third indication information is i 1 . That is, in this example, the first PMI, i 3 , takes any value of 0, 1, 2, 3 , and the second PMI includes three values, namely i 2,1 , i 2,2 ,i Phase difference between 2,3 and i 2,3 and two polarized antennas on the access network device
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000175
Correspondingly, the value of i 1 is always zero. Wherein, the value of i 3 is equal to 1, and the value of l determines the value of θ, i 2 , 1 is equal to j 1 , and i 2 , 2 is equal to j 2 . In addition, the value of the above i 3 may be {0, 1, 2, 3}, which mainly depends on the number of quantization bits X of θ, and the maximum value of i 3 is smaller than X; the value of the above i 2, 3 may be Is {0,1,2,3}, which depends mainly on
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000176
The quantization bit; the value of the above i 2,1 , i 2,2 may be {0, 1}, which mainly depends on the number of antenna ports in one polarization direction.
(2)第二种实现方式:(2) The second implementation:
该实现方式下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000177
该实现方式下的目标预编码矩阵W与上述第二种场景下的两级矩阵的W相同,参数解释也相同,在此不再赘述。其中,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000178
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000179
第三矩阵I MN为(M×N)×(M×N)的单位矩阵。
In this implementation,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000177
The target precoding matrix W in the implementation manner is the same as the W of the two-level matrix in the second scenario, and the parameter interpretation is the same, and details are not described herein again. Wherein the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000178
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000179
The third matrix I MN is an identity matrix of (M × N) × (M × N).
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000180
其中,W 2为第二矩阵,W 1为第一矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000181
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000182
分别为两个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵w。该W 1和W 2分别由独立的指示信息进行指示。例如,W 1由第一PMI指示,即l的值由第一PMI确定,可选的,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。W 2由第二PMI指示,即j 1和j 2
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000183
的值可以由第二PMI确定,j 1可以等于j 2,也可以不等于j 2,该第二PMI是一种子带PMI。W 1中的θ也可以进行标量量化,(例如用X个值对θ进行量化),并作为调制符号承载在PUSCH上随路由终端反馈给接入网设备,第三指示信息恒等于0。
In order to explain the present embodiment more clearly, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network devices have a common 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000180
Wherein W 2 is a second matrix, and W 1 is a first matrix.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000181
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000182
The sub precoding matrices w corresponding to the two antenna port groups respectively. The W 1 and W 2 are respectively indicated by independent indication information. For example, W 1 is indicated by the first PMI, that is, the value of l is determined by the first PMI. Alternatively, the first PMI may be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI. W 2 is indicated by the second PMI, ie j 1 and j 2 and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000183
The value may be determined by the second PMI, j 1 may be equal to j 2 or may not be equal to j 2 , and the second PMI is a sub-band PMI. θ in W 1 can also be scalar quantized (for example, quantizing θ with X values), and carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH, and fed back to the access network device with the routing terminal, the third indication information is always equal to zero.
针对该例子,可选的,其也可以对应上述表4所示的码本结构,在此不再赘述。For the example, the codebook structure shown in Table 4 above may also be selected, and details are not described herein again.
作为本申请的另一种可能的实施方式,该实施方式提供了另一种目标预编码矩阵W的结构。需要说明的是,前述实施例一个天线端口组对应一个子预编码矩阵w,本实施例中,每个天线端口组的每个极化方向对应一个子预编码矩阵w,这里的子预编码矩阵w为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000184
As another possible implementation of the present application, this embodiment provides a structure of another target precoding matrix W. It should be noted that, in the foregoing embodiment, one antenna port group corresponds to one sub-precoding matrix w. In this embodiment, each polarization direction of each antenna port group corresponds to one sub-precoding matrix w, where the sub-precoding matrix is used. w is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000184
具体的,本实施方式也分别从上述两种场景对目标预编码矩阵W进行介绍。Specifically, in this embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is also introduced from the above two scenarios.
1、第一种场景1, the first scene
该场景下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000185
所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000186
表示长度为2×1的矩阵,所述k等于k 1,k 2...k N中的任一值,{a 1,a 2...a N}中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的极化方向总个数,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
In this scenario,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000185
Said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000186
Representing a matrix of length 2 × 1, the k being equal to any of k 1 , k 2 ... k N , one element in {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is 1, other elements All are 0, the N is the total number of polarization directions of the antenna port group on the access network device, and the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is determined according to the first PMI. Said j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
该目标预编码矩阵W可以被拆分为两级矩阵,即
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000187
其中,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000188
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000189
当然,其可以被拆分为三级矩阵,拆分出来的第三矩阵为单位阵,可以参见上述实施例的描述,在此不再赘述。
The target precoding matrix W can be split into two levels of matrix, ie
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000187
Wherein the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000188
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000189
Of course, it can be split into a three-level matrix, and the split third matrix is a unit matrix. For details, refer to the description of the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天 线端口组中的极化方向为2,即N=4。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000190
W对应第一矩阵和第二矩阵两级矩阵,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000191
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000192
(a 1,a 2,a 3,a 4)与第一PMI对应,即第一PMI的值决定了(a 1,a 2,a 3,a 4)各自的取值,(a 1,a 2,a 3,a 4)中仅有一个为1,其余均为0,(k 1,k 2,k 3,k 4)与第二PMI对应,即第二PMI的值决定了(k 1,k 2,k 3,k 4)。其中,(k 1,k 2,k 3,k 4)可以相同,也可以不同。另外,该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。第二PMI可以是一种子带PMI。
In order to more clearly illustrate the present embodiment, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the polarization direction in each antenna port group is 2, that is, N=4. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000190
W corresponds to a two-level matrix of the first matrix and the second matrix, and the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000191
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000192
(a 1 , a 2 , a 3 , a 4 ) corresponds to the first PMI, that is, the value of the first PMI determines the respective values of (a 1 , a 2 , a 3 , a 4 ), (a 1 , a 2 , a 3 , a 4 ) only one is 1, the rest are 0, (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ) corresponds to the second PMI, ie the value of the second PMI determines (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ). Wherein, (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ) may be the same or different. Additionally, the first PMI can be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI. The second PMI can be a subband PMI.
针对上述例子,可选的,其对应的码本结构可以为表5所示,该表5中所示的码本结构为本申请所提供的新的码本。For the above example, optionally, the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 5. The codebook structure shown in Table 5 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
表5table 5
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000193
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000193
表5中,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000194
对应的第一PMI为i 1,1,i 1,2,i 1,3,i 1,4,对应的第二PMI为i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,i 2,4。即,该例子中,第一PMI包括四个值,分别是i 1,1,i 1,2,i 1,3,i 1,4,第二PMI包括四个值,分别是i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,i 2,4。其中,i 1,1等于第一矩阵中a 1元素的值,i 1,2等于第一矩阵中a 2元素的值,i 1,3等于第一矩阵中a 3 元素的值,i 1,4等于第一矩阵中a 4元素的值,i 2,1等于k 1,i 2,2等于k 2,i 2,3等于k 3,i 2,2等于k 4
Table 5, target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000194
Corresponding first PMI is i 1,1 , i 1,2 , i 1,3 , i 1,4 , and the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 , i 2, 4 . That is, in this example, the first PMI includes four values, namely i 1,1 , i 1,2 , i 1,3 , i 1,4 , and the second PMI includes four values, respectively i 2,1 , i 2 , 2 , i 2 , 3 , i 2 , 4 . Where i 1,1 is equal to the value of the a 1 element in the first matrix, i 1,2 is equal to the value of the a 2 element in the first matrix, i 1,3 is equal to the value of the a 3 element in the first matrix, i 1, 4 is equal to the value of the a 4 element in the first matrix, i 2,1 is equal to k 1 , i 2,2 is equal to k 2 , i 2,3 is equal to k 3 , i 2,2 is equal to k 4 .
2、第二种场景2, the second scenario
该场景下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000195
所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000196
表示长度为2×1的矩阵,所述k等于k 1,k 2...k S中的任一值,所述S小于或等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备上天线端口组的极化方向的总个数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000197
表示不同极化方向之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000198
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,l=1,…,X-1,X为集合{2,4,8,…}中的值,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000199
根据所述第一PMI对应,所述k 1,k 2...k S根据所述第二PMI对应。
In this scenario,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000195
Said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000196
Representing a matrix of length 2×1, the k being equal to any value of k 1 , k 2 ... k S , the S being less than or equal to N, the N being an antenna port on the access network device The total number of polarization directions of the group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000197
Representing a phase difference between different polarization directions,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000198
Equal to any of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, l = 1, ..., X-1, X is the value in the set {2, 4, 8, ...}, the X is equal to Quantitative bit number of θ, said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000199
According to the first PMI correspondence, the k 1 , k 2 ... k S correspond according to the second PMI.
该目标预编码矩阵W可以被拆分为两级矩阵,即
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000200
其中,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000201
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000202
当然,其可以被拆分为三级矩阵,拆分出来的第三矩阵为单位阵,可以参见上述实施例的描述,在此不再赘述。
The target precoding matrix W can be split into two levels of matrix, ie
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000200
Wherein the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000201
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000202
Of course, it can be split into a three-level matrix, and the split third matrix is a unit matrix. For details, refer to the description of the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
为了更清楚的说明本实施方式,这里以接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中的极化方向为2,即N=2。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000203
W对应第一矩阵和第二矩阵两级矩阵,第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000204
第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000205
与第一PMI对应,即第一PMI的值决定了
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000206
各自的取值,(k 1,k 2,k 3,k 4)与第二PMI对应,即第二PMI的值决定了(k 1,k 2,k 3,k 4)。其中,(k 1,k 2,k 3,k 4)可以相同,也可以不同。
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000207
也可以进行标量量化(例如用X个值对
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000208
进行量化),并作为调制符号承载在PUSCH上随路由终端反馈给接入网设备。另外, 该第一PMI可以是一种宽带PMI,或者是一种子带PMI。第二PMI可以是一种子带PMI。
In order to more clearly illustrate the present embodiment, the access network device has two antenna port groups, and the polarization direction in each antenna port group is 2, that is, N=2. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000203
W corresponds to a two-level matrix of the first matrix and the second matrix, and the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000204
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000205
Corresponding to the first PMI, that is, the value of the first PMI determines
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000206
The respective values, (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ) correspond to the second PMI, that is, the value of the second PMI determines (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ). Wherein, (k 1 , k 2 , k 3 , k 4 ) may be the same or different.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000207
It is also possible to perform scalar quantization (eg with X value pairs)
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000208
The quantization is performed, and is carried as a modulation symbol on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device along with the routing terminal. Additionally, the first PMI can be a wideband PMI or a subband PMI. The second PMI can be a subband PMI.
针对上述例子,可选的,其对应的码本结构可以为表6所示,该表6中所示的码本结构为本申请所提供的新的码本。For the above example, optionally, the corresponding codebook structure may be shown in Table 6. The codebook structure shown in Table 6 is a new codebook provided by the present application.
表6Table 6
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000209
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000209
表6中,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000210
对应的第一PMI为i 1,1,i 1,2,i 1,3,,对应的第二PMI为i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,i 2,4。即,该例子中,第一PMI包括三个值,分别是i 1,1,i 1,2,i 1,3,,第二PMI包括四个值,分别是i 2,1,i 2,2,i 2,3,i 2,4。其中,i 1,1,的值等于l 1,i 1,2,的值等于l 2,i 1,3,的值等于l 3,i 2,1等于k 1,i 2,2等于k 2,i 2,3等于k 3,i 2,2等于k 4
Table 6, target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000210
The corresponding first PMI is i 1,1 , i 1,2 , i 1,3, and the corresponding second PMI is i 2,1 , i 2,2 , i 2,3 , i 2,4 . That is, in this example, the first PMI includes three values, respectively i 1,1 , i 1,2 , i 1,3, and the second PMI includes four values, namely i 2,1 , i 2 , 2 , i 2 , 3 , i 2 , 4 . Wherein, the value of i 1,1, is equal to l 1 , the value of i 1,2, is equal to l 2 , the value of i 1,3, is equal to l 3 , i 2,1 is equal to k 1 , i 2,2 is equal to k 2 , i 2 , 3 is equal to k 3 , i 2 , 2 is equal to k 4 .
作为本申请的另一种可能的实施方式,该实施方式提供了另一种目标预编码矩阵W的结构。本实施方式也分别从上述两种场景对目标预编码矩阵W进行介绍。As another possible implementation of the present application, this embodiment provides a structure of another target precoding matrix W. In the present embodiment, the target precoding matrix W is also introduced from the above two scenarios.
1、第一种场景1, the first scene
该场景下,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000211
该目标预编码矩阵W中,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000212
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000213
是维度2×1的矩阵,该矩阵的各个元素表示同一面板上多个波束,且该矩阵的各个元素可以包含幅度信息或者相位信息。上述{a 1,a 2...a N}中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0(即{a 1,a 2...a N}为面板选择因子),可选的,{a 1,a 2...a N}也可以为幅度因子,取值范围是0到1之间的实数。可选的,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI对应,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000214
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000215
根据所述第二PMI对应。可选的,第二矩阵中的
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000216
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000217
也可以进行标量量化,作为调制符号承载在PUSCH上随路反馈给接入网设备。
Target precoding matrix in this scenario
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000211
In the target precoding matrix W,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000212
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000213
Is a matrix of dimensions 2 x 1, the elements of the matrix represent multiple beams on the same panel, and the elements of the matrix may contain amplitude information or phase information. One of the above elements {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is 1, and all other elements are 0 (ie, {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is a panel selection factor), optionally, { a 1 , a 2 ... a N } can also be an amplitude factor, and the value range is a real number between 0 and 1. Optionally, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is corresponding to the first PMI, and the
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000214
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000215
Corresponding according to the second PMI. Optional, in the second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000216
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000217
The scalar quantization can also be performed as a modulation symbol carried on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device.
可选的,该目标预编码矩阵可以被拆分两级矩阵,即Optionally, the target precoding matrix can be split into two levels of matrix, ie
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000218
W 1是第一矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000219
W 2是第二矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000220
N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,I M为M*M的单位阵。
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000218
W 1 is the first matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000219
W 2 is the second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000220
N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, and I M is a unit matrix of M*M.
可选的,该目标预编码矩阵可以被拆分三级矩阵,即Optionally, the target precoding matrix can be split into a three-level matrix, that is,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000221
其中,W 1是第一矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000222
W 2是第二矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000223
W 3为M*M的单位阵I M。N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数。可选的,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI对应,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000224
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000225
根据所述第二PMI对应,I M与恒为0的第三PMI对应。
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000221
Where W 1 is the first matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000222
W 2 is the second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000223
W 3 is the unit matrix I M of M* M . N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, and the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group. Optionally, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } is corresponding to the first PMI, and the
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000224
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000225
According to the second PMI correspondence, I M corresponds to a third PMI that is always 0.
例如,当接入网设备具有两个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即N=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000226
该目标预编码矩阵被拆分为两级矩阵的形式可以为
For example, when the access network device has two antenna port groups, the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, N=2, M=4, and the access network device has 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000226
The target precoding matrix is split into a two-level matrix.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000227
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000227
当该目标预编码矩阵被拆分为三级矩阵的形式可以为:When the target precoding matrix is split into three levels of matrix, it can be:
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000228
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000228
2、第二种场景2, the second scenario
该场景下,目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000229
该目标预编码矩阵W中,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000230
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000231
是维度2×1的矩阵,该矩阵的各个元素表示同一面板上多个波束,且该矩阵的各个元素可以包含幅度信息或者相位信息。所述S小于或等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备上天线端口分组的总个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000232
为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,X为集合{2,4,8,…}中的值,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000233
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000234
根据所述第二PMI确定。可选的,所述第二矩阵中的
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000235
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000236
也可以进行标量量化,作为调制符号承载在PUSCH上随路反馈给接入网设备。
Target precoding matrix in this scenario
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000229
In the target precoding matrix W,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000230
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000231
Is a matrix of dimensions 2 x 1, the elements of the matrix represent multiple beams on the same panel, and the elements of the matrix may contain amplitude information or phase information. The S is less than or equal to N, where N is the total number of antenna port packets on the access network device, and the M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000232
The phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to each antenna port group in the S antenna port groups, l=1, . . . , X-1, X is the value in the set {2, 4, 8, ...}, the X a number of quantization bits equal to θ, the 1 being determined according to the first PMI,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000233
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000234
Determined according to the second PMI. Optionally, in the second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000235
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000236
The scalar quantization can also be performed as a modulation symbol carried on the PUSCH and fed back to the access network device.
可选的,该目标预编码矩阵可以被拆分两级矩阵,即Optionally, the target precoding matrix can be split into two levels of matrix, ie
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000237
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000237
W 1是第一矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000238
W 2是第二矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000239
S为接入网设备告知终端的为接入网设备选择的部分天线端口组的总个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,I M为M*M的单位阵,所述l根据所述第一PMI对应,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000240
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000241
根据所述第二PMI对应。
W 1 is the first matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000238
W 2 is the second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000239
S is the total number of partial antenna port groups selected by the access network device for the access network device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group, and I M is a unit of M*M Array according to the first PMI, the
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000240
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000241
Corresponding according to the second PMI.
可选的,该目标预编码矩阵可以被拆分三级矩阵,即Optionally, the target precoding matrix can be split into a three-level matrix, that is,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000242
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000242
W 1是第一矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000243
W 2是第二矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000244
W 3是第三矩阵I M,所述l与所述第一PMI对应,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000245
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000246
与所述第二PMI对应,I M与恒为0的第三PMI对应。
W 1 is the first matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000243
W 2 is the second matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000244
W 3 is a third matrix I M corresponding to the first PMI,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000245
with
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000246
Corresponding to the second PMI, I M corresponds to a third PMI that is always 0.
例如,当接入网设备具有三个天线端口组,每个天线端口组中天线端口的个数为4,即S=2,M=4,接入网设备共有8个天线端口。该例子下,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000247
该目标预编码矩阵被拆分为两级矩阵的形式可以为
For example, when the access network device has three antenna port groups, the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group is 4, that is, S=2, M=4, and the access network device has 8 antenna ports. In this example,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000247
The target precoding matrix is split into a two-level matrix.
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000248
当该目标预编码矩阵被拆分为三级矩阵的形式可以为:
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000248
When the target precoding matrix is split into three levels of matrix, it can be:
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000249
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000249
综上上述几种可能的实施方式,本申请提供了多种目标预编码矩阵W,其均考虑了天线端口组之间的差异参数,或者,该目标预编码矩阵W可以为针对一个第一天线端口组的预编码矩阵,因此,即使接入网设备存在多个天线面板,且多个天线面板阵列间距不均匀时,该目标预编码矩阵W也能够修正多个波束的指向性,避免产生过多的旁瓣,提高了波束赋形增益,进而增大了天线的容量。In summary, the present application provides a plurality of target precoding matrices W, each of which takes into account a difference parameter between antenna port groups, or the target precoding matrix W may be for a first antenna. The precoding matrix of the port group, therefore, even if there are multiple antenna panels in the access network device, and the spacing of the plurality of antenna panel arrays is not uniform, the target precoding matrix W can correct the directivity of the multiple beams, thereby avoiding generation The multiple side lobes increase the beamforming gain, which in turn increases the antenna capacity.
图3为本申请提供的终端实施例的结构示意图。本实施例中,该终端可以通过软件、硬件或者软硬件结合的方式实现。如图3所示,该终端包括:确定模块301和发送模块302。FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a terminal provided by the present application. In this embodiment, the terminal can be implemented by software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. As shown in FIG. 3, the terminal includes: a determining module 301 and a sending module 302.
所述确定模块301,用于基于接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送的参考信号获得目标预编码矩阵,并根据码本确定所述目标预编码矩阵对应的目标指示信息,所述码本包括预编码矩阵与指示信息的对应关系,所述预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,其中,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组的部分或全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵;The determining module 301 is configured to obtain a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device by using multiple antenna port groups, and determine target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix according to the codebook, where the codebook And including a correspondence between a precoding matrix that is a product of a first matrix and a second matrix, where the first matrix is used to select a first antenna port from the plurality of antenna port groups a group or a parameter for characterizing a difference between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to a part or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups;
所述发送模块302,用于向接入网设备发送所述目标指示信息。The sending module 302 is configured to send the target indication information to an access network device.
在上述实施例的基础上,进一步地,图4为本申请提供的终端的另一实施例的结构示意图。如图4所示,所述终端,还包括:第一接收模块303。所述第一接收模块303,用于在所述确定模块301获得目标预编码矩阵之前,从所述接入网设备接收第一配置信息, 所述第一配置信息用于指示所述终端采用的所述码本。On the basis of the foregoing embodiments, FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of the terminal provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the terminal further includes: a first receiving module 303. The first receiving module 303 is configured to receive first configuration information from the access network device before the determining module 301 obtains the target precoding matrix, where the first configuration information is used to indicate that the terminal uses The codebook.
在上述实施例的基础上,进一步地,图5为本申请提供的终端的另一实施例的结构示意图。如图5所示,所述终端,还包括:第二接收模块304。所述第二接收模块304,用于在所述确定模块301获得目标预编码矩阵之前,从所述接入网设备接收第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数。On the basis of the foregoing embodiments, FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of the terminal provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 5, the terminal further includes: a second receiving module 304. The second receiving module 304 is configured to receive second configuration information from the access network device before the determining module 301 obtains the target precoding matrix, where the second configuration information is used to configure the codebook. parameter.
可选的,所述第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。Optionally, the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
可选的,所述指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,所述第一PMI用于指示所述第一矩阵,所述第二PMI用于指示所述第二矩阵。Optionally, the indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating a PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
可选的,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000250
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000251
所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000252
Optionally, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the wireless channel corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups. Phase difference; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000250
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000251
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000252
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000253
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000254
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于或等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备的天线端口组的数量,所述M为天线端口组中的天线端口的数量,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000255
为所述天线端口组两个极化方向之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000256
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000257
为S个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000253
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000254
a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S being less than or equal to N, the N being the number of antenna port groups of the access network device, M is the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000255
a phase difference between two polarization directions of the antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000256
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000257
a phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the S antenna port groups, l=1, . . . , X-1, where X is equal to the number of quantization bits of θ, and the l is determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
可选的,所述第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组; 所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000258
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000259
所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000260
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000261
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000262
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000263
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000264
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
Optionally, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the multiple antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the antenna port group; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000258
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000259
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000260
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000261
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000262
a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network The number of antenna port groups on the device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000263
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000264
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
本申请提供的终端,可以执行上述信息的传输方法的实施例,其实现原理和技术效果类似,在此不再赘述。The terminal provided by the present application can perform the foregoing embodiment of the method for transmitting the information, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
需要说明的是,应理解以上终端的各个模块的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。且这些模块可以全部以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现;也可以全部以硬件的形式实现;还可以部分模块通过软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现,部分模块通过硬件的形式实现。例如,确定模块可以为单独设立的处理元件,也可以集成在终端的某一个芯片中实现,此外,也可以以程序的形式存储于终端的存储器中,由终端的某一个处理元件调用并执行确定模块的功能。其它模块的实现与之类似。此外这些模块全部或部分可以集成在一起,也可以独立实现。这里所述的处理元件可以是一种集成电路,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤或以上各个模块可以通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。此外,以上各接收模块是一种控制接收的模块,可以通过终端的接收装置,例如天线和射频装置接收基站发送的信息。以上发送模块是一种控制发送的模块,可以通过终端的发送装置,例如天线和射频装置向基站发送信息。It should be noted that the division of each module of the above terminal is only a division of a logical function, and the actual implementation may be integrated into one physical entity in whole or in part, or may be physically separated. And these modules can all be implemented by software in the form of processing component calls; or all of them can be realized in the form of hardware; some modules can be realized by software in the form of processing component calls, and some modules are realized by hardware. For example, the determining module may be a separately set processing element, or may be integrated in a certain chip of the terminal, or may be stored in a memory of the terminal in the form of a program, and is called and executed by a processing element of the terminal. The function of the module. The implementation of other modules is similar. In addition, all or part of these modules can be integrated or implemented independently. The processing elements described herein can be an integrated circuit with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method or each of the above modules may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element or an instruction in a form of software. In addition, each of the above receiving modules is a module for controlling reception, and the information transmitted by the base station can be received by the receiving device of the terminal, such as an antenna and a radio frequency device. The above sending module is a module for controlling transmission, and can send information to the base station through a transmitting device of the terminal, such as an antenna and a radio frequency device.
以上这些模块可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个特定集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),或,一个或多个微处理器 (digital singnal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)等。再如,当以上某个模块通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现时,该处理元件可以是通用处理器,例如中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU)或其它可以调用程序的处理器。再如,这些模块可以集成在一起,以片上系统(system-on-a-chip,SOC)的形式实现。The above modules may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, such as one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), or one or more microprocessors (digital singnal processor) , DSP), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs). As another example, when one of the above modules is implemented in the form of a processing component scheduler, the processing component can be a general purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU) or other processor that can invoke the program. As another example, these modules can be integrated and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
图6A为本申请提供的终端的另一实施例的结构示意图。如图6A所示,该终端可以包括发送器160、存储器161、处理器162和至少一个通信总线163。通信总线163用于实现元件之间的通信连接。存储器161可能包含高速RAM存储器,也可能还包括非易失性存储NVM,例如至少一个磁盘存储器,存储器161中可以存储各种程序,用于完成各种处理功能以及实现本实施例的方法步骤。可选的,该终端还可以包括接收器164。本实施例中,发送器160可以为终端中的射频模块或者基带模块,接收器164也可以是终端中的射频模块或者基带模块。其中,发送器160和接收器164均耦合至所述处理器162。FIG. 6A is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 6A, the terminal can include a transmitter 160, a memory 161, a processor 162, and at least one communication bus 163. Communication bus 163 is used to implement a communication connection between components. Memory 161 may include high speed RAM memory, and may also include non-volatile memory NVM, such as at least one disk memory, in which various programs may be stored for performing various processing functions and implementing the method steps of the present embodiments. Optionally, the terminal may further include a receiver 164. In this embodiment, the transmitter 160 may be a radio frequency module or a baseband module in the terminal, and the receiver 164 may also be a radio frequency module or a baseband module in the terminal. Wherein both transmitter 160 and receiver 164 are coupled to the processor 162.
具体的,本实施例中,所述处理器162,用于基于接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送的参考信号获得目标预编码矩阵,并根据码本确定所述目标预编码矩阵对应的目标指示信息,所述码本包括预编码矩阵与指示信息的对应关系,所述预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,其中,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组的部分或全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵;Specifically, in this embodiment, the processor 162 is configured to obtain a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device by using multiple antenna port groups, and determine, according to the codebook, the target precoding matrix. a target indication information, where the codebook includes a correspondence between a precoding matrix and a first matrix, where the precoding matrix is a product of a first matrix and a second matrix, where the first matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the port group or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix including a sub-pre-corresponding to a part or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups Coding matrix
所述发送器160,用于向接入网设备发送所述目标指示信息。The transmitter 160 is configured to send the target indication information to an access network device.
可选的,所述接收器164,用于在所述处理器162获得目标预编码矩阵之前,从所述接入网设备接收第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于指示所述终端采用的所述码本。Optionally, the receiver 164 is configured to receive first configuration information from the access network device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the terminal, before the processor 162 obtains a target precoding matrix. The codebook employed.
可选的,所述接收器164,还用于在所述处理器162获取目标预编码矩阵之前,从所述接入网设备接收第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数。Optionally, the receiver 164 is further configured to: before the processor 162 acquires the target precoding matrix, receive second configuration information from the access network device, where the second configuration information is used to configure the The codebook's parameters.
可选的,所述第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。Optionally, the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
可选的,所述指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,所述第一PMI用于指示所述第一矩阵,所述第二PMI用于指示所述第二矩阵。Optionally, the indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating a PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
可选的,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000265
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000266
所述目标预编码矩 阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000267
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000268
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000269
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于或等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备的天线端口组的数量,所述M为天线端口组中的天线端口的数量,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000270
为所述天线端口组两个极化方向之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000271
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000272
为S个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
Optionally, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the wireless channel corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups. Phase difference; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000265
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000266
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000267
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000268
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000269
a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S being less than or equal to N, the N being the number of antenna port groups of the access network device, M is the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000270
a phase difference between two polarization directions of the antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000271
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000272
a phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the S antenna port groups, l=1, . . . , X-1, where X is equal to the number of quantization bits of θ, and the l is determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
可选的,所述第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000273
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000274
所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000275
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000276
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000277
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数, 所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000278
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000279
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
Optionally, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the multiple antenna port groups of the access network device, where the first matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the antenna port group; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000273
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000274
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000275
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000276
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000277
a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network The number of antenna port groups on the device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000278
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000279
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
本申请提供的终端,可以执行上述信息的传输方法的实施例,其实现原理和技术效果类似,在此不再赘述。The terminal provided by the present application can perform the foregoing embodiment of the method for transmitting the information, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图6B为本申请提供的终端的另一实施例的结构示意图。参见图6B,该终端包括:处理器110、存储器120、收发装置130。其中,收发装置130可以与天线连接。在下行方向上,收发装置130通过天线接收网络设备发送的信息,并将信息发送给处理器110进行处理。在上行方向上,处理器110对终端的数据进行处理,并通过收发装置130发送给网络设备。FIG. 6B is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a terminal provided by the present application. Referring to FIG. 6B, the terminal includes: a processor 110, a memory 120, and a transceiver 130. The transceiver device 130 can be connected to an antenna. In the downlink direction, the transceiver 130 receives the information transmitted by the network device through the antenna, and transmits the information to the processor 110 for processing. In the uplink direction, the processor 110 processes the data of the terminal and sends the data to the network device through the transceiver 130.
该存储器120用于存储实现以上方法实施例,或者图3-图5所示实施例各个模块的程序,处理器110调用该程序,执行以上方法实施例的操作,以实现图3-图5所示的各个模块。The memory 120 is used to store a program for implementing the above method embodiments, or the modules of the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 5, and the processor 110 calls the program to perform the operations of the foregoing method embodiments to implement the operations of the foregoing method. Each module shown.
或者,以上各个单元的部分或全部也可以通过集成电路的形式内嵌于该终端的某一个芯片上来实现。且它们可以单独实现,也可以集成在一起。即以上这些单元可以被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个特定集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),或,一个或多个微处理器(digital singnal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)等。Alternatively, part or all of the above units may be implemented by being embedded in a chip of the terminal in the form of an integrated circuit. And they can be implemented separately or integrated. That is, the above units may be configured to implement one or more integrated circuits of the above method, for example, one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), or one or more microprocessors (digital singnal processor) , DSP), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs).
图7为本申请提供的接入网设备实施例的结构示意图。本实施例中,该接入网设备可以通过软件、硬件或者软硬件结合的方式实现。可选地,所述接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送信息。如图7所示,该接入网设备包括:接收模块701和确定模块702。FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of an access network device provided by the present application. In this embodiment, the access network device can be implemented by using software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. Optionally, the access network device sends information through multiple antenna port groups. As shown in FIG. 7, the access network device includes: a receiving module 701 and a determining module 702.
其中,接收模块701,用于接收终端上报的信道状态信息,所述信道状态信息包括目标指示信息;The receiving module 701 is configured to receive channel state information reported by the terminal, where the channel state information includes target indication information.
确定模块702,用于根据码本确定所述目标指示信息对应的目标预编码矩阵,所述码本包括指示信息与预编码矩阵的对应关系,所述预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组的部分或者全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵。a determining module 702, configured to determine, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix corresponding to the target indication information, where the codebook includes a correspondence between the indication information and a precoding matrix, where the precoding matrix is a first matrix and a second matrix a first matrix for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising the A sub-precoding matrix corresponding to some or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups.
在上述实施例的基础上,进一步地,图8为本申请提供的接入网设备的另一实施例的结构示意图。如图8所示,所述接入网设备还包括:第一发送模块703。所述第一发送模块703,用于向所述终端发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端采用所述码本。On the basis of the foregoing embodiments, FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 8, the access network device further includes: a first sending module 703. The first sending module 703 is configured to send first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook.
在上述实施例的基础上,进一步地,图9为本申请提供的接入网设备的另一实施例的结构示意图。如图9所示,所述接入网设备还包括:第二发送模块704。所述第二发送模块704,用于在所述接收模块701接收终端上报的信道状态信息之前,向所述终端发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数。On the basis of the foregoing embodiments, FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 9, the access network device further includes: a second sending module 704. The second sending module 704 is configured to send second configuration information to the terminal before the receiving module 701 receives channel state information reported by the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook. .
可选的,所述第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。Optionally, the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
可选的,所述指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,所述第一PMI用于指示所述第一矩阵,所述第二PMI用于指示所述第二矩阵。Optionally, the indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating a PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
可选的,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000280
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000281
所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000282
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000283
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000284
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备上天线端口组的数量,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000285
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000286
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000287
为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
Optionally, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the wireless channel corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups. Phase difference; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000280
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000281
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000282
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000283
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000284
a matrix, the k is equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S is less than or equal to N, and the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, the M For the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000285
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000286
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000287
For each antenna port of the S antenna port groups, group the phase difference between the corresponding wireless channels, l=1, . . . , X-1, where X is equal to the number of quantization bits of θ, and the 1 is according to the first PMI It is determined that the j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
可选的,所述第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述的一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000288
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000289
所述目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000290
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000291
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000292
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000293
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000294
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
Optionally, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the antenna port group; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000288
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000289
Target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000290
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000291
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000292
a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network The number of antenna port groups on the device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000293
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000294
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, said {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } according to said first PMI, said j 1 , j 2 .. .j N is determined according to the second PMI.
本申请提供的接入网设备,可以执行上述信息的传输方法的实施例,其实现原理和技术效果类似,在此不再赘述。An access network device provided by the present application may perform an embodiment of the foregoing method for transmitting information, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
需要说明的是,应理解以接入网设备的各个模块的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。且这些模块可以全部以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现;也可以全部以硬件的形式实现;还可以部分模块通过软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现,部分模块通过硬件的形式实现。例如,确定模块可以为单独设立的处理元件,也可以集成在上述装置的某一个芯片中实现,此外,也可以以程序的形式存储于上述装置的存储器中,由上述接入网设备的某一个处理元件调用并执行确定模块的功能。其它模块的实现与之类似。此外这些模块全部或部分可以集成在一起,也可以独立实现。这里所述的处理元件可以是一种集成电路,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤或以上各个模块可以通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。此外,以上发送模块是一种控制发送的模块,可以通过接入网设备的发送装置,例如天线和射频装置向终端发送信息。接收模块是一种控制接收的模块,可以通过接入网设备的接收装置,例如天线和射频装置接收终端发送的信息。It should be noted that the division of each module of the access network device is only a division of logical functions, and may be integrated into one physical entity or physically separated in whole or in part. And these modules can all be implemented by software in the form of processing component calls; or all of them can be realized in the form of hardware; some modules can be realized by software in the form of processing component calls, and some modules are realized by hardware. For example, the determining module may be a separately set processing element, or may be integrated in one of the above-mentioned devices, or may be stored in the memory of the above device in the form of a program, by one of the access network devices. The processing component invokes and performs the function of determining the module. The implementation of other modules is similar. In addition, all or part of these modules can be integrated or implemented independently. The processing elements described herein can be an integrated circuit with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method or each of the above modules may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element or an instruction in a form of software. In addition, the above sending module is a module for controlling transmission, and can send information to the terminal through a transmitting device of the access network device, such as an antenna and a radio frequency device. The receiving module is a module for controlling receiving, and can receive information sent by the terminal through a receiving device of the access network device, such as an antenna and a radio frequency device.
以上这些模块可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个特定集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),或,一个或多个微处理器(digital singnal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)等。再如,当以上某个模块通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现时,该处理元件可以是通用处理器,例如中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU)或其它可以调用程序的处理器。再如,这些模块可以集成在一起,以片上系统(system-on-a-chip,SOC)的形式实现。The above modules may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, such as one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), or one or more microprocessors (digital singnal processor) , DSP), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs). As another example, when one of the above modules is implemented in the form of a processing component scheduler, the processing component can be a general purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU) or other processor that can invoke the program. As another example, these modules can be integrated and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
图10A为本申请提供的接入网设备的另一实施例的结构示意图。可选的,所述接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送信息。如图10A所示,该站接入网设备可以包括接收器30、存储器31、处理器32和至少一个通信总线33。通信总线33用于实现元件之间的通信连接。存储器31可能包含高速RAM存储器,也可能还包括非易失性存储NVM,例如至少一个磁盘存储器,存储器31中可以存储各种程序,用于完成各种处理功能以及实现本实 施例的方法步骤。可选的,该接入网设备还可以包括发送器34。FIG. 10A is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device according to the present application. Optionally, the access network device sends information through multiple antenna port groups. As shown in FIG. 10A, the station access network device can include a receiver 30, a memory 31, a processor 32, and at least one communication bus 33. The communication bus 33 is used to implement a communication connection between components. Memory 31 may include high speed RAM memory and may also include non-volatile memory NVM, such as at least one disk memory, in which various programs may be stored for performing various processing functions and implementing the method steps of the present embodiments. Optionally, the access network device may further include a transmitter 34.
具体的,本实施例中,所述接收器30,用于接收终端上报的信道状态信息,所述信道状态信息包括目标指示信息;Specifically, in the embodiment, the receiver 30 is configured to receive channel state information reported by the terminal, where the channel state information includes target indication information;
所述处理器32,用于根据码本确定所述目标指示信息对应的目标预编码矩阵,所述码本包括指示信息与预编码矩阵的对应关系,所述预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组的部分或者全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵。The processor 32 is configured to determine, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix corresponding to the target indication information, where the codebook includes a correspondence between the indication information and a precoding matrix, where the precoding matrix is a first matrix and a a product of two matrices for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to a part or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups.
可选的,所述发送器34,用于向所述终端发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端采用所述码本。Optionally, the sender 34 is configured to send first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook.
可选的,所述发送器34,还用于向所述终端发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数。Optionally, the sender 34 is further configured to send second configuration information to the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
可选的,所述第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。Optionally, the second configuration information includes the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
可选的,所述指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,所述第一PMI用于指示所述第一矩阵,所述第二PMI用于指示所述第二矩阵。Optionally, the indication information includes a first precoding matrix indicating a PMI and a second PMI, where the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, and the second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
可选的,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000295
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000296
所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000297
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000298
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000299
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备上天线端口组的数量,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000300
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000301
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000302
为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
Optionally, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to the S antenna port groups of the multiple antenna port groups, where the first matrix is used to represent the wireless channel corresponding to the multiple antenna port groups. Phase difference; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000295
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000296
The target precoding matrix is W, and
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000297
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000298
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000299
a matrix, the k is equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S is less than or equal to N, and the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, the M For the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000300
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000301
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000302
For each antenna port of the S antenna port groups, group the phase difference between the corresponding wireless channels, l=1, . . . , X-1, where X is equal to the number of quantization bits of θ, and the 1 is according to the first PMI It is determined that the j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
可选的,所述第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述的一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组; 所述第一矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000303
所述第二矩阵为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000304
所述目标预编码矩阵
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000305
其中,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000306
表示长度为
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000307
的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000308
为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000309
等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
Optionally, the second matrix includes a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, where the matrix is used to Selecting a first antenna port group in the antenna port group; the first matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000303
The second matrix is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000304
Target precoding matrix
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000305
Wherein said
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000306
Indicates the length is
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000307
a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network The number of antenna port groups on the device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000308
a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-000309
Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
本申请提供的接入网设备,可以执行上述信息的传输方法的实施例,其实现原理和技术效果类似,在此不再赘述。An access network device provided by the present application may perform an embodiment of the foregoing method for transmitting information, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图10B为本申请提供的接入网设备的另一实施例的结构示意图。参见图10B,该接入网设备包括:天线110、射频装置120、基带装置130。天线110与射频装置120连接。在上行方向上,射频装置120通过天线110接收终端发送的信息,将终端发送的信息发送给基带装置130进行处理。在下行方向上,基带装置130对终端的信息进行处理,并发送给射频装置120,射频装置120对终端的信息进行处理后经过天线111发送给终端。FIG. 10B is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an access network device provided by the present application. Referring to FIG. 10B, the access network device includes an antenna 110, a radio frequency device 120, and a baseband device 130. The antenna 110 is connected to the radio frequency device 120. In the uplink direction, the radio frequency device 120 receives the information transmitted by the terminal through the antenna 110, and transmits the information sent by the terminal to the baseband device 130 for processing. In the downlink direction, the baseband device 130 processes the information of the terminal and sends it to the radio frequency device 120. The radio frequency device 120 processes the information of the terminal and sends it to the terminal through the antenna 111.
以上接入网设备可以位于基带装置130,在一种实现中,以上各个单元通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现,例如基带装置130包括处理元件131和存储元件132,处理元件131调用存储元件132存储的程序,以执行以上方法实施例中的方法。此外,该基带装置130还可以包括接口133,用于与射频装置120交互信息,该接口例如为通用公共无线接口(common public radio interface,CPRI)。The above access network device may be located in the baseband device 130. In one implementation, the above various units are implemented in the form of a processing component scheduler, for example, the baseband device 130 includes a processing component 131 and a storage component 132, and the processing component 131 calls the storage component 132 to store The program to perform the method in the above method embodiment. In addition, the baseband device 130 may further include an interface 133 for interacting with the radio frequency device 120, such as a common public radio interface (CPRI).
在另一种实现中,以上这些单元可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个处理元件,这些处理元件设置于基带装置130上,这里的处理元件可以为集成电路,例如:一个或多个ASIC,或,一个或多个DSP,或,一个或者多个FPGA等。这些集成电路可以集成在一起,构成芯片。In another implementation, the above units may be one or more processing elements configured to implement the above methods, the processing elements being disposed on the baseband device 130, where the processing elements may be integrated circuits, such as: one or more ASICs, or one or more DSPs, or one or more FPGAs, etc. These integrated circuits can be integrated to form a chip.
例如,以上各个单元可以集成在一起,以片上系统(system-on-a-chip,SOC)的形式实现,例如,基带装置130包括SOC芯片,用于实现以上方法。该芯片内可以集成处理元 件131和存储元件132,由处理元件131调用存储元件132的存储的程序的形式实现以上方法或以上各个单元的功能;或者,该芯片内可以集成至少一个集成电路,用于实现以上方法或以上各个单元的功能;或者,可以结合以上实现方式,部分单元的功能通过处理元件调用程序的形式实现,部分单元的功能通过集成电路的形式实现。For example, the above various units may be integrated together in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC), for example, the baseband device 130 includes a SOC chip for implementing the above method. The processing element 131 and the storage element 132 may be integrated into the chip, and the functions of the above method or the above units may be implemented by the processing element 131 in the form of a stored program that calls the storage element 132; or, at least one integrated circuit may be integrated into the chip. The functions of the above methods or the above units may be implemented; or, in combination with the above implementation manners, the functions of some units are implemented in the form of processing component calling programs, and the functions of some units are implemented in the form of integrated circuits.
不管采用何种方式,总之,以上接入网设备包括至少一个处理元件,存储元件和通信接口,其中至少一个处理元件用于执行以上方法实施例所提供的方法。处理元件可以以第一种方式:即执行存储元件存储的程序的方式执行以上方法实施例中的部分或全部步骤;也可以以第二种方式:即通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路结合指令的方式执行以上方法实施例中的部分或全部步骤;当然,也可以结合第一种方式和第二种方式执行以上方法实施例提供的方法。In any case, the above access network device comprises at least one processing element, a storage element and a communication interface, wherein at least one processing element is used to perform the method provided by the above method embodiments. The processing element may perform some or all of the steps in the above method embodiments in a manner of executing the program stored in the storage element in the first manner; or in the second manner: through the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor element Some or all of the steps in the foregoing method embodiments are performed in combination with the instructions. Of course, the methods provided in the foregoing method embodiments may also be implemented in combination with the first mode and the second mode.
这里的处理元件同以上描述,可以是通用处理器,例如中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU),还可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个特定集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),或,一个或多个微处理器(digital singnal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)等。The processing elements herein are the same as described above, and may be a general purpose processor, such as a Central Processing Unit (CPU), or may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, for example: one or more specific An Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or one or more digital singnal processors (DSPs), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs).
存储元件可以是一个存储器,也可以是多个存储元件的统称。The storage element can be a memory or a collective name for a plurality of storage elements.

Claims (28)

  1. 一种信息的传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting information, comprising:
    终端基于接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送的参考信号获得目标预编码矩阵;The terminal obtains a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device through multiple antenna port groups;
    所述终端根据码本确定所述目标预编码矩阵对应的目标指示信息,所述码本包括预编码矩阵与指示信息的对应关系,所述预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,其中,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组的部分或全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵;Determining, by the terminal, the target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix according to the codebook, where the codebook includes a correspondence between a precoding matrix and the indication information, where the precoding matrix is a product of the first matrix and the second matrix, The first matrix is configured to select a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or to characterize a difference parameter between the multiple antenna port groups, where the second matrix includes the multiple a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to some or all of the antenna port groups of the antenna port group;
    所述终端向接入网设备发送所述目标指示信息。The terminal sends the target indication information to an access network device.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端获得目标预编码矩阵之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein before the terminal obtains the target precoding matrix, the method further includes:
    所述终端从所述接入网设备接收第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于指示所述终端采用的所述码本。The terminal receives the first configuration information from the access network device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the codebook used by the terminal.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端获得目标预编码矩阵之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein before the terminal obtains the target precoding matrix, the method further includes:
    所述终端从所述接入网设备接收第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数。The terminal receives second configuration information from the access network device, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。The method of claim 3, wherein the second configuration information comprises a number of antenna port groups and/or a number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,所述第一PMI用于指示所述第一矩阵,所述第二PMI用于指示所述第二矩阵。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the target indication information comprises a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, the first PMI being used to indicate the first matrix, The second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;所述第一矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100001
    所述第二矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100002
    所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100003
    The method according to claim 5, wherein the second matrix comprises a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used to represent the multiple a phase difference between the wireless channels corresponding to the antenna port groups; the first matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100001
    The second matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100002
    The target precoding matrix is W, and
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100003
    其中,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100004
    表示长度为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100005
    的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于或等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备的天线端口组的数量,所述M为天线端口组中的天线端口的数量,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100006
    为所述天线端口组两个极化方向之间的相位差,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100007
    等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100008
    为S个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
    Wherein said
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100004
    Indicates the length is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100005
    a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S being less than or equal to N, the N being the number of antenna port groups of the access network device, M is the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100006
    a phase difference between two polarization directions of the antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100007
    Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100008
    a phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the S antenna port groups, l=1, . . . , X-1, where X is equal to the number of quantization bits of θ, and the l is determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;所述第一矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100009
    所述第二矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100010
    所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100011
    其中,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100012
    表示长度为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100013
    的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100014
    为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100015
    等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
    The method according to claim 5, wherein the second matrix comprises a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, the a matrix for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100009
    The second matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100010
    The target precoding matrix is W, and
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100011
    Wherein said
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100012
    Indicates the length is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100013
    a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network The number of antenna port groups on the device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100014
    a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100015
    Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
  8. 一种信息的传输方法,用于接入网设备,其特征在于,所述接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送信息,所述方法包括:A method for transmitting information, which is used for an access network device, wherein the access network device sends information through multiple antenna port groups, and the method includes:
    所述接入网设备接收终端上报的信道状态信息,所述信道状态信息包括目标指示信息;The access network device receives channel state information reported by the terminal, where the channel state information includes target indication information;
    所述接入网设备根据码本确定所述目标指示信息对应的目标预编码矩阵,所述码本包括指示信息与预编码矩阵的对应关系,所述预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组的部分或者全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵。The access network device determines, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix corresponding to the target indication information, where the codebook includes a correspondence between the indication information and a precoding matrix, where the precoding matrix is a first matrix and a second matrix. a first matrix for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising the A sub-precoding matrix corresponding to some or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:The method of claim 8 wherein said method comprises:
    所述接入网设备向所述终端发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端采用所述码本。The access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook.
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备接收终端上报的信道状态信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein before the access network device receives the channel state information reported by the terminal, the method further includes:
    所述接入网设备向所述终端发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数。The access network device sends second configuration information to the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。The method of claim 10, wherein the second configuration information comprises a number of antenna port groups and/or a number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  12. 根据权利要求8-11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,所述第一PMI用于指示所述第一矩阵,所述第二PMI用于指 示所述第二矩阵。The method according to any one of claims 8 to 11, wherein the target indication information comprises a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, wherein the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, the first Two PMIs are used to indicate the second matrix.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;所述第一矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100016
    所述第二矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100017
    所述预编码矩阵为W,且
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100018
    其中,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100019
    表示长度为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100020
    的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备上天线端口组的数量,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100021
    为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100022
    等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100023
    为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
    The method according to claim 12, wherein the second matrix comprises a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used to represent the multiple a phase difference between the wireless channels corresponding to the antenna port groups; the first matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100016
    The second matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100017
    The precoding matrix is W, and
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100018
    Wherein said
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100019
    Indicates the length is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100020
    a matrix, the k is equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S is less than or equal to N, and the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, the M For the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100021
    a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100022
    Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100023
    For each antenna port of the S antenna port groups, group the phase difference between the corresponding wireless channels, l=1, . . . , X-1, where X is equal to the number of quantization bits of θ, and the 1 is according to the first PMI It is determined that the j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
  14. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述的一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;所述第一矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100024
    所述第二矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100025
    所述目标预编码矩阵
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100026
    其中, 所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100027
    表示长度为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100028
    的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100029
    为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100030
    等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
    The method according to claim 12, wherein the second matrix comprises a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, a matrix for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100024
    The second matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100025
    Target precoding matrix
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100026
    Wherein
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100027
    Indicates the length is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100028
    a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network The number of antenna port groups on the device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100029
    a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100030
    Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
  15. 一种终端,其特征在于,包括:处理器和发送器;A terminal, comprising: a processor and a transmitter;
    所述处理器,用于基于接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送的参考信号获得目标预编码矩阵,并根据码本确定所述目标预编码矩阵对应的目标指示信息,所述码本包括预编码矩阵与指示信息的对应关系,所述预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,其中,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组的部分或全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵;The processor is configured to obtain a target precoding matrix based on a reference signal sent by the access network device by using multiple antenna port groups, and determine target indication information corresponding to the target precoding matrix according to the codebook, where the codebook includes Corresponding relationship between the precoding matrix and the indication information, wherein the precoding matrix is a product of the first matrix and the second matrix, wherein the first matrix is used to select the first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups Or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to a part or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups;
    所述发送器,用于向接入网设备发送所述目标指示信息。The transmitter is configured to send the target indication information to an access network device.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的终端,其特征在于,所述终端还包括:接收器;The terminal according to claim 15, wherein the terminal further comprises: a receiver;
    所述接收器,用于在所述处理器获得目标预编码矩阵之前,从所述接入网设备接收第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于指示所述终端采用的所述码本。The receiver is configured to receive first configuration information from the access network device before the processor obtains a target precoding matrix, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the codebook used by the terminal .
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的终端,其特征在于,所述接收器,还用于在所述处理器获取目标预编码矩阵之前,从所述接入网设备接收第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数。The terminal according to claim 16, wherein the receiver is further configured to receive second configuration information, the second, from the access network device before the processor acquires a target precoding matrix. The configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。The terminal according to claim 17, wherein the second configuration information comprises the number of antenna port groups and/or the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  19. 根据权利要求15-18任一项所述的终端,其特征在于,所述指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,所述第一PMI用于指示所述第一矩阵,所述第二PMI用于指示所述第二矩阵。The terminal according to any one of claims 15 to 18, wherein the indication information comprises a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, wherein the first PMI is used to indicate the first matrix, The second PMI is used to indicate the second matrix.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;所述第一矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100031
    所述第二矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100032
    所述预编码矩阵为W,且
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100033
    The terminal according to claim 19, wherein the second matrix comprises a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used to represent the multiple a phase difference between the wireless channels corresponding to the antenna port groups; the first matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100031
    The second matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100032
    The precoding matrix is W, and
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100033
    其中,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100034
    表示长度为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100035
    的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于或等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备的天线端口组的数量,所述M为天线端口组中的天线端口的数量,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100036
    为所述天线端口组两个极化方向之间的相位差,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100037
    等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100038
    为S个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
    Wherein said
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100034
    Indicates the length is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100035
    a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S being less than or equal to N, the N being the number of antenna port groups of the access network device, M is the number of antenna ports in the antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100036
    a phase difference between two polarization directions of the antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100037
    Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100038
    a phase difference between the radio channels corresponding to the S antenna port groups, l=1, . . . , X-1, where X is equal to the number of quantization bits of θ, and the l is determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的终端,其特征在于,所述第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;所述第一矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100039
    所述第二矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100040
    所述预编码矩阵为W,且
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100041
    其中,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100042
    表示长度为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100043
    的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100044
    为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100045
    等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
    The terminal according to claim 19, wherein the second matrix comprises a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, the a matrix for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100039
    The second matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100040
    The precoding matrix is W, and
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100041
    Wherein said
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100042
    Indicates the length is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100043
    a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network The number of antenna port groups on the device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100044
    a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100045
    Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
  22. 一种接入网设备,其特征在于,所述接入网设备通过多个天线端口组发送信息,所述接入网设备包括:接收器和处理器;An access network device, wherein the access network device sends information through multiple antenna port groups, where the access network device includes: a receiver and a processor;
    所述接收器,用于接收终端上报的信道状态信息,所述信道状态信息包括目标指示信息;The receiver is configured to receive channel state information reported by the terminal, where the channel state information includes target indication information;
    所述处理器,用于根据码本确定所述目标指示信息对应的目标预编码矩阵,所述码本包括指示信息与预编码矩阵的对应关系,所述预编码矩阵为第一矩阵和第二矩阵的积,所述第一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组或者用于表征所述多个天线端口组之间的差异参数,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组的部分或者全部天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵。The processor is configured to determine, according to the codebook, a target precoding matrix corresponding to the target indication information, where the codebook includes a correspondence between the indication information and a precoding matrix, where the precoding matrix is a first matrix and a second a product of a matrix for selecting a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups or for characterizing a difference parameter between the plurality of antenna port groups, the second matrix comprising A sub-precoding matrix corresponding to some or all of the antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述接入网设备还包括发送器;The access network device according to claim 22, wherein the access network device further comprises a transmitter;
    所述发送器,用于向所述终端发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端采用所述码本。The transmitter is configured to send first configuration information to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal to use the codebook.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述发送器,还用于向所述终端发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述码本的参数。The access network device according to claim 23, wherein the transmitter is further configured to send second configuration information to the terminal, where the second configuration information is used to configure parameters of the codebook.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述第二配置信息包括天线端口组的数量和/或天线端口组中天线端口的数量。The access network device according to claim 24, wherein the second configuration information comprises a number of antenna port groups and/or a number of antenna ports in the antenna port group.
  26. 根据权利要求22-25任一项所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述指示信息包括第一预编码矩阵指示PMI和第二PMI,所述第一PMI用于指示所述第一矩阵,所述第二PMI用于指示所述第二矩阵。The access network device according to any one of claims 22-25, wherein the indication information comprises a first precoding matrix indicating PMI and a second PMI, wherein the first PMI is used to indicate the first a matrix, the second PMI being used to indicate the second matrix.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述第二矩阵包括所述多个天线端口组中S个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述第一矩阵用于表征所述多个天线端口组对应的无线信道之间的相位差;所述第一矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100046
    所述第二矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100047
    所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100048
    其中,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100049
    表示长度为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100050
    的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述S小于等于N,所述N为所述接入网设备上天线端口组的数量,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100051
    为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100052
    等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100053
    为S个天线端口组中各个天线端口分组对应的无线信道之间的相位差,l=1,…,X-1,所述X等于θ的量化比特数,所述l根据所述第一PMI确 定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
    The access network device according to claim 26, wherein the second matrix comprises a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to S antenna port groups of the plurality of antenna port groups, and the first matrix is used for characterization a phase difference between the wireless channels corresponding to the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100046
    The second matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100047
    The target precoding matrix is W, and
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100048
    Wherein said
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100049
    Indicates the length is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100050
    a matrix, the k is equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , the S is less than or equal to N, and the N is the number of antenna port groups on the access network device, the M For the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100051
    a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100052
    Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j},
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100053
    For each antenna port of the S antenna port groups, group the phase difference between the corresponding wireless channels, l=1, . . . , X-1, where X is equal to the number of quantization bits of θ, and the 1 is according to the first PMI It is determined that the j 1 , j 2 ... j N are determined according to the second PMI.
  28. 根据权利要求26所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述第二矩阵包含所述接入网设备的所述多个天线端口组中的每个天线端口组对应的子预编码矩阵,所述的一矩阵用于从所述多个天线端口组中选择第一天线端口组;所述第一矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100054
    所述第二矩阵为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100055
    所述目标预编码矩阵为W,且
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100056
    其中,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100057
    表示长度为
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100058
    的矩阵,所述k等于j 1,j 2...j N中的任一值,所述第一矩阵中的一个元素为1,其他元素均为0,所述N为所述接入网设备上的天线端口组的个数,所述M为每个天线端口组中的天线端口的个数,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100059
    为所述接入网设备上两个极化天线之间的相位差,所述
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100060
    等于{+1,-1,+j,-j}中的任一个值,所述{a 1,a 2...a N}根据所述第一PMI确定,所述j 1,j 2...j N根据所述第二PMI确定。
    The access network device according to claim 26, wherein the second matrix comprises a sub-precoding matrix corresponding to each of the plurality of antenna port groups of the access network device, The matrix is configured to select a first antenna port group from the plurality of antenna port groups; the first matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100054
    The second matrix is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100055
    The target precoding matrix is W, and
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100056
    Wherein said
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100057
    Indicates the length is
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100058
    a matrix, the k being equal to any one of j 1 , j 2 ... j N , one element in the first matrix is 1, and the other elements are all 0, and the N is the access network The number of antenna port groups on the device, where M is the number of antenna ports in each antenna port group,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100059
    a phase difference between two polarized antennas on the access network device,
    Figure PCTCN2018079721-appb-100060
    Equal to any one of {+1, -1, +j, -j}, the {a 1 , a 2 ... a N } being determined according to the first PMI, the j 1 , j 2 . ..j N is determined according to the second PMI.
PCT/CN2018/079721 2017-03-24 2018-03-21 Information transmission method and apparatus WO2018171604A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201710184769.7A CN108631837B (en) 2017-03-24 2017-03-24 Information transmission method and equipment
CN201710184769.7 2017-03-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018171604A1 true WO2018171604A1 (en) 2018-09-27

Family

ID=63584129

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2018/079721 WO2018171604A1 (en) 2017-03-24 2018-03-21 Information transmission method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN108631837B (en)
WO (1) WO2018171604A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023169430A1 (en) * 2022-03-08 2023-09-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 Pusch transmission method, terminal, and network side device
WO2023206291A1 (en) * 2022-04-28 2023-11-02 Nec Corporation Methods, devices, and computer readable medium for communication

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111246589B (en) * 2018-11-28 2022-04-12 华为技术有限公司 Random access signal sending method and device
WO2020227941A1 (en) * 2019-05-14 2020-11-19 华为技术有限公司 Method and apparatus for reporting channel state information, and related device
CN112020092B (en) * 2019-05-31 2022-05-24 华为技术有限公司 Channel information acquisition method and device
CN114788184A (en) * 2019-12-06 2022-07-22 华为技术有限公司 Channel information determination method and device
WO2023201623A1 (en) * 2022-04-21 2023-10-26 Apple Inc. Channel state information (csi) measurement and reporting for scalable multiple-input multiple-output (mimo) communication on a downlink
CN117041985A (en) * 2022-04-29 2023-11-10 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090080549A1 (en) * 2007-09-26 2009-03-26 Farooq Khan Efficient MIMO precoding feedback scheme
CN102308491A (en) * 2008-12-21 2012-01-04 Lg电子株式会社 Data transmission device and method in a wireless communications system
CN103973410A (en) * 2013-02-01 2014-08-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Channel information feedback method, channel information feedback device, data transmission method and data transmission device
CN105264787A (en) * 2012-12-20 2016-01-20 谷歌技术控股有限责任公司 Method and apparatus for antenna array channel feedback
CN106130614A (en) * 2016-07-15 2016-11-16 上海华为技术有限公司 Method, subscriber equipment and the base station of a kind of low overhead feedback

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101640649B (en) * 2008-08-01 2012-11-07 上海华为技术有限公司 Method and device for determining channel prediction factor in channel prediction and channel predictor
CN105706373B (en) * 2014-05-30 2020-04-03 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for reporting Channel State Information (CSI) and base station antenna
CN105530075B (en) * 2014-10-04 2019-05-17 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 A kind of CSI feedback method and apparatus in FD-MIMO communication
KR20170109015A (en) * 2015-01-30 2017-09-27 후아웨이 테크놀러지 컴퍼니 리미티드 Non-orthogonal multiple access transmission method, base station and user equipment
CN106487435B (en) * 2015-08-24 2020-03-03 电信科学技术研究院 Method and device for transmitting coding indication information and determining precoding matrix

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090080549A1 (en) * 2007-09-26 2009-03-26 Farooq Khan Efficient MIMO precoding feedback scheme
CN102308491A (en) * 2008-12-21 2012-01-04 Lg电子株式会社 Data transmission device and method in a wireless communications system
CN105264787A (en) * 2012-12-20 2016-01-20 谷歌技术控股有限责任公司 Method and apparatus for antenna array channel feedback
CN103973410A (en) * 2013-02-01 2014-08-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Channel information feedback method, channel information feedback device, data transmission method and data transmission device
CN106130614A (en) * 2016-07-15 2016-11-16 上海华为技术有限公司 Method, subscriber equipment and the base station of a kind of low overhead feedback

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI ET AL.: "UL codebook design in NR", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #88 R1-1701686, 17 February 2017 (2017-02-17), XP051208852 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023169430A1 (en) * 2022-03-08 2023-09-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 Pusch transmission method, terminal, and network side device
WO2023206291A1 (en) * 2022-04-28 2023-11-02 Nec Corporation Methods, devices, and computer readable medium for communication

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN108631837A (en) 2018-10-09
CN108631837B (en) 2021-06-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018171604A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus
RU2695125C1 (en) Methods and apparatus for determining precoder parameters in a wireless communication network
JP7403459B2 (en) Measurement reporting method, terminal equipment and network equipment
CN107733493B (en) Method and apparatus for determining precoding matrix
RU2707735C1 (en) System and method of transmitting subset selection information
WO2018171727A1 (en) Method for transmitting channel state information, terminal device and network device
WO2017071674A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method, base station and terminal
JP6750926B2 (en) Precoding matrix indicator feedback method and apparatus
US20220263560A1 (en) Channel state information reporting method and communications apparatus
US10673508B2 (en) Channel state information feedback method, user equipment, and base station
KR20160129057A (en) Method for reporting channel state information, user equipment, and base station
JP7238167B2 (en) Precoding matrix display and determination method, and communication device
CN111342873A (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
CN110350957B (en) Communication method and communication device
US11363585B2 (en) Method and apparatus for obtaining downlink channel information
WO2017194007A1 (en) Two-stage precoding method and device
WO2016119655A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining codebook
WO2021081847A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
CN112312464A (en) Method and communication device for reporting channel state information
CN108282204B (en) Communication method, device and system
US11159346B2 (en) Co-polarized feedback for frequency domain compression
WO2020244496A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
US20200119796A1 (en) Channel state information transmission method, access network device, and terminal device
WO2022227976A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2020155116A1 (en) Pmi reporting method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18771937

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18771937

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1